<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Pwevarranger2</id>
	<title>vArranger - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Pwevarranger2"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Pwevarranger2"/>
	<updated>2026-04-15T06:39:48Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=4._INSTALLATION&amp;diff=813</id>
		<title>4. INSTALLATION</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=4._INSTALLATION&amp;diff=813"/>
		<updated>2019-07-11T21:55:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /*  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After ordering on the official vArranger Website : https://www.varranger.com&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or directly through PayPal at:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:va2paypallogo_150px.jpg|150x150px|link=https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&amp;amp;hosted_button_id=954JMYAW8WV6L]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Software will be delivered (within 24 hours) after verified purchase payment with the installation instructions and the vArranger2 software download(s) via Email.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Response to a new purchase is &#039;Manual&#039; not automated. Please be parient.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Before installing any files &#039;right click&#039; on the downloaded file and go to &amp;quot;Properties&amp;quot; at the bottom of the list and &#039;unblock&#039; the file if it is blocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
First you will receive the Activation Key file: Active.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This requires registration with Name and Email Address.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once installed and registration is confirmed you will receive the vArranger2 software.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Activation Key Installation Methods:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Choose between two modes of Activation Key installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended Dongle Method&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) - Installation and Registration of Activation Key on a separate USB Flash Drive (brand Kingston, Sandisk, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This will allow you to install the vArranger2 software separately on any computer and use it by plugging in the USB Flash Drive containing Activation Key (Dongle) before launching vArranger2. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative One System Only Method&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) - Installation and Registration of Activation Key directly on computer. This requires no USB, but only works with the vArranger2 software installed on that same computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This choice is final.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Next you will receive the vArranger2.zip software file. This is the actual program.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Recommended Installation:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Unzip the vArranger2.zip File and copy the vArranger2 Folder to main hard drive C:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;vArranger2 is a &#039;Portable Self-Executable&#039; Program and may be installed in the directory/location of choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For Assistance and Information&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Create a User Account at the vArranger2 Forum at: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;https://www.varranger.com/vforum/index.php&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is advisable that you use same Email Address as provided at time of purchase.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Choose s Username and Password.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: Additional configuration of MIDI In/Out settings and Audio In/Out settings is required for proper function of the vArranger2 software.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After installation of vArranger2 and start of program immediately &#039;click on&#039; the &#039;OPTIONS&#039; (Green Button) on top left of the program main screen control panel and open &#039;MIDI PORTS&#039; to modify MIDI and Audio information as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NORTON ANTIVIRUS INFORMATION&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Norton AntiVirus may scan and quarantine/remove part or all of a vArranger2 file download.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This does not imply that the file download is unacceptable.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is simply a safety precaution procedure typical of Norton AntiVirus.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Immediately open Norton AntiVirus Main Control Panel and click on the History button (large clock icon).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the History list click on the vArranger2 file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;On the right in the Details list instruct Norton AntiVirus to restore and permanently exclude the File from future scans.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is advisable to perform this procedure immediately after Norton AntiVirus activity to be able to locate and restore the File from the top of the History list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See Also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main Page|MAIN PAGE]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[5._FUNCTIONS_vA2|5. FUNCTIONS vA2]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.9._MY_SONGS&amp;diff=809</id>
		<title>5.9. MY SONGS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.9._MY_SONGS&amp;diff=809"/>
		<updated>2019-07-10T04:39:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /* SAVE */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== MY SONGS MENU ==&lt;br /&gt;
MY  SONGS  part  is  very  useful  because  it  allows  performance  to  present  on  the  screen  all necessary to the smooth running of files. It can contain any kind of file: Styles, Registrations, MIDI sequences, karaoke etc..&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig51.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This  framework  contains  12  labels  or  11  banks  over  a  navigation  arrow  for  exceeding  the number of banks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each bank contains the files shown in the left column, which itself can contain multiple pages like the VOICE column (see 5.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a category button MY SONGS (UNPLUGGED, POP, DANCE, BALLAD ...), open Windows Explorer directly pointed at this issue. Nothing is easier to add or modify files. Once  the  changes  are  complete,  it  is  recommended  that  you  click  &#039;Refresh&#039;  to  refresh  the display. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Files can be: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig51a.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The label changes color only when the file is read natively by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to automatically display lyrics (*.  Txt) and especially the score of the piece to play. You just have to show that the file is in a subdirectory &amp;quot;son&amp;quot; of the SONGS folder that named &amp;quot;SCORE&amp;quot; and it bears the same name. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  display  PDF  files  requires  downloading  and  installing  a  Plug  In  available  for  free  here: &lt;br /&gt;
http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 802.0.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In  the  case  of  use  with  a  second  screen,  the  partition  will  automatically  appear  on  the  latter which  can  be  positioned  in  portrait  example  for  comfort  and  readability  mode.  The  score  is displayed and scalable and can be epositioned at will. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
According to its position in the score, the mouse pointer may take various forms:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig51b.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  left  column  shows  the  first  10  &amp;quot;SONGS&amp;quot;  in  the  selected  bank.  By  clicking  with  the  right button on a SONG (a style, or any other file in theleft column), a new menu appears with four users choice: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig52.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MOVE TO ...: Allows you to move to another folder SONG =&amp;gt; select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig53.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;COPY TO ...: Allows you to copy a file to another SONG =&amp;gt; select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig54.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE ...: Deletes a SONG (the files go to the recycle bin)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig55.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;RENAME ...: Rename a SONG (enter a new name for this song)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig56.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These features will bring up a new window with a list of ALL files reports with the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a ROCK.PAT style, there would also be displayed ROCK.PAT2 that contains the information  recorded  by  SAVE  SONG,  but  also  rock.jpg,  ROCK1.JPG,  ROCK2.JPG, ROCK.RTF which are partitions and / or words of this song in the SCORE directory. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
So if you delete, rename or move a SONG, all files related to this SONG (by default they are all selected) will be deleted, renamed or moved automatically at once. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This will greatly facilitate the organization of your directory. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOAD ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to load a vArranger compatible file, usually for files not present in the MY SONGS bar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger can load the following file formats:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;STYLES&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
KETRON STYLES : PAT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
YAMAHA STYLES : STY, BCS, PRS, FPS, SST, PST, PCS, SCP&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ROLAND STYLES : STL&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
KORG STYLES : STY&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TECHNICS STYLES : CMP, CST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TEXT&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TXT Text, RTF Rich Text Format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;IMAGE&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, TIF, TIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AUDIO&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : WAV, MP3, MP3+CDG, WMA, OGG, AIFF, FLAC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MIDIFILES&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : MID, MIDI, KAR &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Cakewalk Sonar Instrument Definition File .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;PDF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : (Requires the free [https://www.varranger.com/vforum/index.php?topic=802.0 vArranger PDF Plugin] )&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;BIAB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : MGx, SGx song chords from Band In a Box files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle6.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SAVE ===&lt;br /&gt;
The SAVE function saves the settings made previously, a menu will reappear with the following options backup: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:va2savopts.jpg | 200x180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; STARTUP  CONFIG &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This function  allows  you  to find  the  same  set  of  settings  each  time  you  start  the  program.  A window summarizes the settings saved in the defaultconfiguration the next time. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig58.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :  AUTOSTART MIDIFILE &amp;amp; MP3 can play music directlyin the selection of a song, without having to press &#039;&#039;&#039;START.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The SAVE function saves the settings made previously, a menu will reappear with the following options backup:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig59.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG NAME: &#039;&#039;&#039; Name given to this set of control (&amp;quot;bayonet&amp;quot; in the example)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;FOLDER:&#039;&#039;&#039; Folder which will be saved in all settings namedMY SONGS in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Recording format FOLDER: 2 Numbers in parentheses immediately following the name of the folder (here REGISTRATION) is used to classify banks MY SONGS, the first 4 characters (brackets  +  2  digits)  are  invisible  in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2 &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; and  are  only  used  by  the  software  to  classify  files (FOLDER) in an order chosen by default and can be modified by the user. For the name of a folder &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the first 18 characters on 2 lines maximum. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user checks the backup options according to their needs or all together with SAVE ALL. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With box 12 ASSIGN S CONTROLLERS checked, assigned to &amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot; controllers as a foot control, a MIDI pedal or any other button (QWERTY keyboard or keyboard MASTER) a joystick etc..  Settings  are  stored  for  the  SONG  in  progress  .  This  function  allows,  if  necessary, customize the use of external auditors for each song.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== THE &amp;quot;MY SONGS&amp;quot; FOLDER ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  feature  allows  the  background,  for  example  to  create  or  delete  rename  folders  in  the &lt;br /&gt;
working directory  &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; without leaving the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the label  [[File:Fig59a.jpg]]  &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays  the  Windows  file  manager,  prepositioned in the working directory named default: StylesROM1 (ref. 2). &lt;br /&gt;
This directory is a subfolder of the directory vArranger (ref. 1) created under the root of the hard disk of the computer during the installation &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig60.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  working  directory &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;(StyleROM1)  defaults  to  10  sub-folders  whose  names begin with two numbers  in parentheses as (04) SWING. The figures, invisible in&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Represent  the  fourth  position  in  the  bar  MY  SONGS,  which  allows  a personalized  classification  of  genres  simply  by  changing  the  first  two  numbers while retaining brackets.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The number of sub folders is not limited by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the example in the figure above, the file &#039;&#039;&#039;DANCE (ref. 3) contains a sub-folder in which you can place text, partitions or other files found useful.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When  this  subfolder  is  called  SCORE  (ref.  4)  and  contains  files  with  the  same  name  as  the SONG (ref. 5), eg THIS IS MY LIFE is a partition then it will automatically display the call the &lt;br /&gt;
SONG. THIS IS MY LIFE. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another example can be seen that &amp;quot;hell&amp;quot; is two pages in jpg format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== REFRESH ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to refresh the data stored on the computer and used by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; without &lt;br /&gt;
needing  to  restart  the  software.  This  function  is  very  useful  when  the  user  changes  in  the background with MY SONGS FOLDER or with another task, the data working directory &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SEARCH ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function is very useful when searching for such a lunch kar SONG or on computer disk file. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig61.jpg | 300px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this window, the lens becomes green and the cursor moves ready characters to &lt;br /&gt;
search. As and when the user hits the letters (and  / or numbers) &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
shows the occurrences &lt;br /&gt;
already found the magnifying glass turns red during the search and turns green at the end of the process. At this point, double-click the desired title (grayed) the load in drive A. The search engine is very fast, the steps may not be well received. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pressing  the  assigned  to  the  search  function  search function  (SEARCH)  button  activates.  A second press cancels the current search. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LYRICS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig62.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
LYRICS The function displays in a new window the information contained on the track LYRICS MIDI or KAR files or user-defined. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The popup window is floating and resizable. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to disable the automatic display of partitions SCORE file by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY SCORE OF THE SONGS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to disable the automatic display of the words of midi files, by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE LYRICS midi LYRICS The button turns red when this function is active.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== KARAOKE ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig63.jpg | 180px| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
KARAOKE function displays in a new window the information contained on the track KARAOKE MIDI or KAR or user-defined files. &lt;br /&gt;
The popup window is floating and resizable. Also, it is possible to record the start position of the Karaoke window by right-clicking on the window and Karaoke: SAVE WINDOW POSITION&lt;br /&gt;
KARAOKE button turns red when this function is active. &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to disable the automatic display of karaokemidi, by right clicking on the button Karaoke then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE KARAOKE midi&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig64.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See Also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main Page|MAIN PAGE]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[5.10._MIXER|5.10. MIXER]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Va2savopts.jpg&amp;diff=808</id>
		<title>File:Va2savopts.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Va2savopts.jpg&amp;diff=808"/>
		<updated>2019-07-10T04:33:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=9._APPENDIX&amp;diff=767</id>
		<title>9. APPENDIX</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=9._APPENDIX&amp;diff=767"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:30:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-exhaustive and non-exclusive examples of possible configurations &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Good practice example: multiple controller units and different scene instances &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What is the best way to have two different instances/scenes of controllers set up. Ie. I have Two different kontroller units but need same controlls over VA. Depending on the gig I will use one or the other controller units. (not both together) &lt;br /&gt;
Ie. for set up scene  ONE = NanoKontroller with midi accordion. &lt;br /&gt;
alternative&lt;br /&gt;
Set up TWO = Roland midi controller keyboard with accordion&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Close to the vArranger2.exe program, you have a folder called vArrangerData. Inside this folder, there is a file called vArranger2.ini. Everything about your controllers are inside this file. So, You can set the midi ports and controllers for the accordion setup then save the vArranger2.ini and call it vArranger2-ACC.ini You can set the midi ports and controllers for the keyboard setup then save the vArranger2.ini and call it vArranger2-KEYB.ini Then before running vArranger2, decide witch one you want to use and rename it as vArranger2.ini&lt;br /&gt;
A good solution. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This again shows the brilliant and ongoing versatility of vArranger. However you got me thinking if I could avoid the renaming. Rather than the slight effort of renaming the &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; files for different set ups - here is a suggestion.If I created two new FOLDERS (not files) within the vArrangerdata folder and as you suggested I will name one FOLDER &amp;quot;vArranger2-ACC.ini&amp;quot; and the other FOLDER &amp;quot;vArranger2-KEYB.ini&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
In each folder I would have the relevant version of the same name &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; file for each controllers set up option. &lt;br /&gt;
I would then simply drag the ini file out of the relevant ini folders into the vArranger data folder as needed for each set up. So all that I will need to do is drag the &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; file as needed depending on my set up for that gig. &lt;br /&gt;
I am aware that having two &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; files with the same name will require greater care to avoid confusion. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : In all these configurations, MIDI connections to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; are made via a MIDI interface the number of entries that will be needed (UM-3G Cakewalk by Roland for example - ed) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig78.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig79.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig80.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig81.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig82.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=8._CONTACT&amp;diff=766</id>
		<title>8. CONTACT</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=8._CONTACT&amp;diff=766"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:29:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technical Support or Sales information : https://www.varranger.com/contact-us/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[9._APPENDIX | APPENDIX]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=VSTi&amp;diff=765</id>
		<title>VSTi</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=VSTi&amp;diff=765"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:29:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /* What is a VST Instrument? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== What is a VST Instrument? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The VST (Virtual Studio Technology) system was developed by Steinberg, to enable a complete studio to be created in software. &lt;br /&gt;
It allows third-party developers to produce real-time effects modules (VST or VST FX), or synth engines that are called VST Instruments (VSTi), that could &#039;plug in&#039; to the host application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So basically, a VSTi is a realtime software synthesizer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nowadays, there are large numbers of third-party companies, that are producing VST instrument plug-ins. Some have a very high sound quality, that can surpass their hardware alternatives, while others are not so good.  Some are expensive, and some are free.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The good news is that vArranger has a VST Host, that can load and play, up to 16 VST Instruments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Requirements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you press a note on your midi keyboard, the VSTi program will generate a sound, using the computer processor (CPU).&lt;br /&gt;
This operation needs to be as fast as possible, (less than 5-15 milliseconds), in order that the player does not experience any latency.&lt;br /&gt;
Some VSTi are doing complex calculations, in a very short time. That&#039;s why using VST&#039;s usually need a &#039;faster&#039; computer. Intel Core series processors (Core i3, Core i5 or Core i7), is a good choice.&lt;br /&gt;
The CPU power is shared between all running programs and processes on the computer. So, it is better to avoid installing unnecessary and unneeded programs on a music computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that some VSTi&#039;s load large quantities of sampled sounds (called &amp;quot;samples&amp;quot;) into the computer&#039;s memory (RAM). In the case of using such a VSTi, you need to have enough RAM installed in your computer. 4GB, 8GB or more is recommended.  More memory, means more flexibility and wider choice between which VSTi&#039;s you can accommodate in memory (RAM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some VST&#039;s play the sounds directly from the Hard Drive (streaming). In such cases, a fast Hard drive 7200RPM or better a SSD disk is essential, otherwise, you will hear some clics, or stuttering.&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s simple -  You need the system to be fast enough and available, in order for the computer to produce sound quickly, and thus eliminate clicks and stuttering or sound breakup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger (the VST host) receives the generated sound, and sends it to the PC sound card driver, then to your PC powered speakers, or headphones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are actually 2 kinds of sound cards.  Some are integrated inside your PC motherboard, and some can be optionally installed. Some sound cards are for professional use, more expensive, and give a better quality sound. Other cards are cheaper, but could still give you decent quality. Some sound cards are simply not good enough.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger can communicate with the sound card using 3 different methods :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;DirectSound&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros:&#039;&#039; Available on every computer, the sound can be used by different programs simultaniously.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; It has too much latency and CAN&#039;T be used for realtime synths. Only for MP3 playback. Sound quality may be less good, as the Windows OS adds a layer of mixing operations, and is not &amp;quot;Bit Perfect&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;WASAPI&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros:&#039;&#039; Low latency. Available on every computer since Windows Vista.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; Not available on windows XP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;ASIO&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros:&#039;&#039; Low latency.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; ASIO drivers are only developed by the manufacturer for top end, professional sound cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that there is a free software called ASIO4ALL [http://www.asio4all.com/], created by Michael Tippach, that installs a generic ASIO driver, working for every sound card. This is the only solution for low latency audio if you use Windows XP, without a dedicated pro sound card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that sometimes, different access methods may result in a difference in terms of audio quality and stability. In case of problems, it is useful to test the different options: ASIO &amp;lt;=&amp;gt; ASIO4ALL &amp;lt;=&amp;gt; WASAPI, to find the best working driver for your computer.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring vArranger to play VST Instruments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In vArranger, go on OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS to select the audio outputs you want to use for playing VST instruments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:audio_configuration.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see in this example, the ASIO4ALL output has been selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some sound cards have many audio outputs. You will see them all, displayed in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case of an ASIO sound card with multiple audio outputs, a second sub list will appear to select the desired stereo out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see in this example, I have selected &#039;&#039;&#039;VST&#039;&#039;&#039; as the 2nd MIDI OUT port, but you can select VST for the MIDI OUT 1, if the VST instruments will be your main sound source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have also selected the GM2 mode, this works well for VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The VST Rack ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting VST in the MIDI PORTS screen, will add a new button called VST in the vArranger main screen (top right).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this button will show the VST rack, with 16 slots, to load up to 16 VST instruments (VSTi&#039;s). Think of this as having up to 16 hardware synthesizers at your fingertips, at your instant disposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vsti.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- To load a VST Instrument, click on the central and empty zone (2).&lt;br /&gt;
This will allow you to locate the vst that you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
VST plugin files have an extension .DLL&lt;br /&gt;
They are usually installed in a centralized VST folder, but when you install a VST plugin, you have the choice to define a different VST installation folder. So be attentive at this path, so you can find it easily in vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;If you don&#039;t have any VST instruments, you can start by searching on google for free VST instruments.&lt;br /&gt;
This website contains a nice compilation of free VST plugins to download&#039;&#039; [http://lesitedeburnie.free.fr/lalistedeburnie1-en.html]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that vArranger loads &#039;&#039;&#039;32 Bit or 64 Bit VST 2.4 plug ins&#039;&#039;&#039;, in concordance with the version of the vArranger audio engine version currently installed (32 Bit or 64 Bit).  &#039;&#039;If you really need to load 32 Bit and 64 Bit plug ins, together in the same project, you need to install a software like jBridge&#039;&#039; [http://jstuff.wordpress.com/jbridge/] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once loaded, you will see the name of your VST in the VST Rack line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the same zone (2), on the VST name, and you will see the &#039;&#039;&#039;VST EDITOR&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is the graphical screen of the VST, where you can interact with it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note : VST plugins do not always have an editor, but most have one.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exp : NI B4II&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:nib4ii.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- To remove a VST from the rack, click on the [X] (4)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Some plugins have PROGRAMS. They are predefined factory presets. If some are present, you will see the rack line number lightened (1). Clicking on it will allow you to see and select a program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VstPrograms.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VST Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [+] (3) will allow you to see more options for every VST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VSTOptions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(1) &#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039; : A click on the P letter will show the PROGRAMS of the VST (Same as (1) of the VST Rack)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2) &#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039; : The X will unload the VST (same as (4) of the VST Rack)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(3) &#039;&#039;&#039;BYPASS&#039;&#039;&#039; : This will bypass the VST. If it is an instrument, it will be muted. If is if an effect plugin, this can be useful to listen and compare the sound WITH and WITHOUT the VST treatment. CPU usage decreases while the VST is bypassed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(4) &#039;&#039;&#039;SEND ON MIDI CHANNEL 1&#039;&#039;&#039; : Please read &amp;quot; Monotimbral VS Multitimbral &amp;quot; below&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(5) &#039;&#039;&#039;ALWAYS ON TOP&#039;&#039;&#039; : Check this box, and the VST Editor screen will always be on top of the other windows. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is great for most VSTi. But, some plugins are displaying sometimes a modal message box, waiting for your answer, e.g. &amp;quot;Do you want to load this sound?&amp;quot;  If the VST editor is &amp;quot;always on top&amp;quot;, it can be on top of such messages, and you will think that the VST is hanging when it really is just waiting for your response, for the message that you don&#039;t see. In this case, you need to disable this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;If the VST editor is actually open, you need to close it and open it again to see it Always on top.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(6) &#039;&#039;&#039;SEND TO FX1/FX2/FX3 KNOBS&#039;&#039;&#039; : This allows to adjust the level of effects to add to the VSTi. &#039;&#039;More info on the 3 auxiliary effects circuits on the EFFECTS section.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful as some VSTi does not include an FX section, or you may want to use a very high quality reverb VST plugin/chorus/delay... that will be shared with the vArranger Software Synthesizer AND with the 16 VST instruments AND with the audio input too. This can save some CPU too, not having to compute many reverbs, for every VSTi, and has the advantage to place all the instruments sources in the same virtual &amp;quot;room&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
If you edit the VST options of the FX3, you will be able to adjust the FX1 knob. This is a special feature that allows you to send the FX3 output (usually a delay) to the FX1 engine (usually a reverb). This way, the echoed voices produced by the delay are not dry, but also with some reverb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(7) &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE THE CURRENT PLUGIN STATE AS BANK FXB&#039;&#039;&#039; : This will ask to the VST plugin to save the full bank into a file. Banks usually contains many presets, but every VST plugin decide what they put in the saved file. Some VST use this as a full state saving. Give a name to your saving, and it will go to the list (10)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(8) &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE THE CURRENT PLUGIN STATE AS PRESET FXP&#039;&#039;&#039; : This will ask to the VST plugin to save the current preset, not the full bank into a file. This may be lighter than the FXB saving. Only a test can determine what is the best saving method for every VST, to see what is then recalled, how fast, cutting the sound? and the size of the saved file. The file name will start with a &amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot; to differentiate from bank savings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(9) &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE AS STARTUP CONFIG BANK FXB and PRESET FXP&#039;&#039;&#039; : This is the VST state that will be recalled when starting vArranger&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(10) &#039;&#039;&#039;VST STATES LIST&#039;&#039;&#039; : You can save different states of the plugin for every song or sound, and reload them from the list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(11) &#039;&#039;&#039;LOAD&#039;&#039;&#039; : Load the current selected state in the list. Double clicking on the list does the same&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(12) &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039; : Delete the current selected state in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(13) &#039;&#039;&#039;THE PARAMETERS LIST&#039;&#039;&#039; : VST plugins has some parameters that can be changed to modulate the sound. You can see here the list of all the VST parameters, and their actual value. Parameters are often similar between the VST graphical editor, and this parameter list, but not always, as the VST plugin decides what parameters it want to exposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(14) &#039;&#039;&#039;VALUE&#039;&#039;&#039; : When you select a parameter in the list, this slider will display the current parameter value. It is interesting to see the parameters are bi-directional : changing the parameter value in vArranger will move a knob or a fader in the VST editor, and in the other side, moving a knob in the VST editor, cause the parameters values to change in vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(15) (16) (17) (18) : &#039;&#039;&#039;VST CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039; : You may want to use a physical midi controller to change a VST parameter value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More info here https://www.varranger.com/vforum/index.php?topic=1760.0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Monotimbral VS Multitimbral ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Monotrimbral: Most VST Instruments specialize in one type of sound, for example, analogue synth simulations, Hammond tonewheel organs simulations, Mellotrons, wavetable synths, drums or guitar plugins...&lt;br /&gt;
They are intended to play only ONE instrument at a time. They are listening by default to the MIDI channel 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For such Monotimbrals plugins, Go on the VST OPTIONS screen, and check &#039;&#039;&#039;SEND ON MIDI CHANNEL 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Multibrimbral: This type of VSTi is designed to allow you to play different sounds on different MIDI channels simultaneously. For example, a General MIDI compatible VST Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, you don&#039;t have to check this box. Be careful of the vArranger midi channel assignation. (eg : RIGHT1 Track = Midi Channel 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you plan to use only ONE channel of a multitimbral VSTi, you can check the option to send on midi channel 1, so you don&#039;t need to be careful to set the midi channel inside the plugin. This means you use the multitrimbral VSTi, as a monotrimbral VSTi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;LIMITATION :&#039;&#039;&#039; When you use the &amp;quot;channel 1&amp;quot; option, you need to be careful that only &#039;&#039;&#039;ONE&#039;&#039;&#039; track is using the same VSTi at any given time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Flexible Routing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every track of vArranger can be routed to a different VST instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RIGHT CLICKING on the track will allow you to select the desired MIDI OUT and/or the VST Instrument that will be used to play this track.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:vstroute.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This routing is saved with the Song (SAVE SONG) and with the Sound (SAVE RIGHT SOUND / SAVE LEFT SOUND)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[8._CONTACT | CONTACT]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=SF2&amp;diff=764</id>
		<title>SF2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=SF2&amp;diff=764"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:28:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /* What is the vArranger Software Synthesizer? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== What is the vArranger Software Synthesizer? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger includes a high quality GM2 software synthesizer, with custom SF2/SFZ samples loading, 256 voice high quality sound synthesis. 16 tracks multitimbral. Effects : Reverb, Chorus. 3 auxiliary VST effects + 1 MASTER VST FX...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thanks to the high efficiency technology developed during the last years, vArranger has realized the feat that allows anyone to play music with vArranger, even without any hardware midi module connected to the computer. The sound is generated in realtime by vArranger and sent to the computer audio card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vArranger software synthesizer comes with a basic, but well balanced soundset, with the first goal in mind to work on most computers, even with low capabilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we always want to play with different sounds, the vArranger software synthesizer allows you to load your own sounds, or any free or commercial sounds in SF2 Soundfont format or SFZ format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Requirements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you press a note on your midi keyboard, the software synthesizer will generate a sound, using the computer processor (CPU).&lt;br /&gt;
This operation need to be as fast as possible, (less than 5 - 15 milliseconds), so the player does not feel any latency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the today computers are able to use the vArranger software synthesizer, with an unnoticeable latency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some slow Atom CPU are not fast enough to play in realtime. It&#039;s simple. If  the computer can&#039;t produce sound fast enough , you will hear some clics, or stuttering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;There is a trick to help in this situation, but at a cost to increase the perceived latency. You press the key, and you hear the sound a bit later.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we also share this CPU power with all the running programs, it is better to avoid installing and running unneeded programs on a music computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In live show situation, it is better to set the computer in &#039;Performance Mode&#039; and to set the &#039;Airplane mode&#039; to turn off the background Wifi and Bluetooth communications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second important point to know, is that the vArranger Software Synthesizer loads every sounds, samples in the computer&#039;s memory (RAM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So if you want to use for example 2GB of SF2 samples, you need to have at least 2GB of RAM free to be able to load them.&lt;br /&gt;
The more you have RAM installed on your computer, the more sounds you will be able to load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to use more than 4GB of SF2 sounds, you need to use the 64 bit version of the vArranger Software Synthesizer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vArranger Software Synthesizer sends the generated sound to the PC sound card driver, then to your PC powered speakers, or headphones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are actually 2 kinds of sound cards.  Some are integrated inside your PC motherboard, and some can be optionally installed. They are professional sound cards with sometimes a better sound quality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger can communicate with the sound card using 3 different methods :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;DirectSound&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros :&#039;&#039; Available on every computer, the sound can be used by different programs together.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; It has too much latency and CAN&#039;T be used for realtime synths. Only for MP3 playback. Sound quality may be less good, as the Windows OS adds a layer of mixing operations, and is not &amp;quot;Bit Perfect&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;WASAPI&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros :&#039;&#039; Low latency. Available on every computer since Windows Vista.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; Not available on windows XP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;ASIO&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros :&#039;&#039; Low latency.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; ASIO drivers are only developed by the manufacturer for the professional sound cards.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that there is a free software called ASIO4ALL [http://www.asio4all.com/], created by Michael Tippach, that installs a generic ASIO driver, working for every sound card. This is the only solution for low latency audio if you use Windows XP, without a dedicated pro sound card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that sometimes, different access methods may result in a difference in term of audio sound or performances. In case of problems, it can be useful to test the different options ASIO &amp;lt;=&amp;gt; ASIO4ALL &amp;lt;=&amp;gt; WASAPI, to find the best working driver for your computer.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring vArranger to play with the Software Synthesizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In vArranger, go on OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS to select the vArranger Software Synthesizer and the audio outputs you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:vASynthPorts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see in this example, it is better to select the &#039;&#039;&#039;vArranger Software Synthesizer&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;GM2 mode&#039;&#039;&#039; as your &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDIOUT1&#039;&#039;&#039; source, and VST or other hardware synth as MIDIOUT2 or MIDIOUT3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, the WASAPI output of the internal laptop sound card has been selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some sound cards have many audio outputs. You will see them all, displayed in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case of an ASIO sound card with multiples audio outputs, a second sub list will appear to select the desired stereo out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is DONE !&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Loading Custom Samples ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vArranger Software Synthesizer allows you to load your own custom samples, and manage your sound set as you want&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To load new sounds, you need to manually copy &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;many&#039;&#039;&#039; SF2 or SFZ files inside your &#039;&#039;&#039;\vArrangerData\SOUNDS\SAMPLES\&#039;&#039;&#039; folder. (The vArrangerData folder, close to your vArranger2.exe program icon).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new instruments presets will be automatically loaded at vArranger&#039;s startup, and the sounds will be ready to play and displayed in every sound category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Info&#039;&#039;&#039; : The position of the loaded instruments inside each sound group will depend on the preset number and follows the GM rules : Preset number 0 will go to the PIANO group  Preset number 33 will go to BASS group...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SF2 - SOUNDFONTS Sounds ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must know a bit about the structure of the SF2 files. A SF2 file, can includes one or many PRESETS. Every preset inside the SF2 file, has a unique BANK and PROGRAM number.&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger will send the MIDI BANK and PROGRAM CHANGE message to select the desired sound.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So this is important that every preset inside your different SF2 files has always a unique BANK and PROGRAM number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If two presets are using the same BANK and PROGRAM number, only one of them will be loaded. The other(s) will be ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case of duplicated bank &amp;amp; presets numbers, you can decide which one will be loaded, by renaming the SF2 file. The files are sorted alphabetically by their name and the last file will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example :&lt;br /&gt;
- SF2 file name = &#039;&#039;&#039;MYPIANO&#039;&#039;&#039;.sf2    PRESET BANK=0   PROGRAM= 0&lt;br /&gt;
- SF2 file name = &#039;&#039;&#039;ZMYPIANO&#039;&#039;&#039;.sf2    PRESET BANK=0   PROGRAM= 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, the sound in the second file will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to modify the PRESET NAME, BANK, PROGRAM NUMBERS etc.... you need an SF2 editor.&lt;br /&gt;
You can find a free SF2 editor here : https://polyphone-soundfonts.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;For advanced users :&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The SF2 format only define 127 BANKS (MSB) of 127 presets + one BANK of 127 DRUMKITS.&lt;br /&gt;
To overcome this limitation, and to comply with different styles formats, we have allowed you to define the BANK 32 - LSB, by changing the preset name.&lt;br /&gt;
For example changing the name of preset from ELECTRICBASS to  &#039;&#039;&#039;2@ELECTRICBASS&#039;&#039;&#039;, this preset will be defined in vArranger as having a BANK 32 (LSB) of 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:polyphone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;For advanced users, even more possibilities are available, to define a sound brand, remapping, etc... please contact us.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SFZ Instruments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SFZ format allows a more in depth synthesis than the SF2 format&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A SFZ instrument is composed of one .sfz file (editable with a text editor) and many relative .wav files (that are often placed close to the sfz file, or better, in a dedicated sub-folder for each sfz file) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SFZ format does not define a program change and banks numbers for each instruments, so here is a way to rename your sfz files, so they can be found by vArranger, at a specific program number : &#039;&#039;&#039;msb.lsb.pc@filename.sfz&#039;&#039;&#039;    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So for exp : grandpiano.sfz   become =&amp;gt;  1.2.7@grandpiano.sfz  (bank cc0 = 1 ; bank cc 32 = 2 ; pc = 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The SF2 and SFZ Volumes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default volume of all samples loaded in vArranger is set at 200% (= +6dB)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some sounds are already sampled very hot, and the default volume value of 200 is too much and cause the sound to distort. In this case, setting a value of 100 is recommended&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set a different volume for each SF2 or SFZ file to adjust the relative volumes between files from different sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do that, you need to edit the \vArrangerData\Sounds\Samples\Volumes.txt file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file lists all the current SF2 and SFZ files and their actual volume.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The SOUNDBANKS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have released 4 sound libraries for vArranger, available as separate purchase. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those 4 SOUNDBANKS have been created to allow a better direct compatibility with the 4 style formats available in vArranger&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More sampling sessions are to come. Please contact us for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The EFFECTS system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vArranger Software Synthesizer sound can be improved by using effects. REVERB and CHORUS are provided, but you can replace them by your preferred VST plugin&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VSTFX.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(1) Click on the label to load a VST plugin for the REVERB, or to show the VST graphical editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2) Click on the label to load a VST plugin for the CHORUS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(3) Click on the label to load a VST plugin for the FX3 (DELAY). The &amp;quot;v&amp;quot; is the left of the label will show some plugin presets, if any exists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(4) The &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; in the right of the label will show the VST options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(5) Click on the label to load a VST plugin for the MASTER. A master EQ or final mix multi-band compressor can improve the sound.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 3 VST circuits are auxiliary. This mean that they will add some effect to the current dry sound. That&#039;s why it is important to set in the VST usually : DRY = 0% and WET = 100% (0dB)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MASTER FX is an Insert. So the DRY value should be 100% (0dB) to get no sound amplification or reduction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those effects are also available for the 16 VST instruments and the AUDIO Input.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[VSTi | 8. USING VST INSTRUMENTS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=6._ERRORS_AND_WARNINGS&amp;diff=763</id>
		<title>6. ERRORS AND WARNINGS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=6._ERRORS_AND_WARNINGS&amp;diff=763"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:28:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please do not select the same MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig77.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SF2 | 7. THE &#039; vArranger Software Synthesizer &#039;]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=762</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=762"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:27:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /* ARRANGER STATUS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, you may increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250.  The  orange-red  arc is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO and provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, buy click and sliding the mouse along a vertical axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The small padlock in the centre and the yellow circle indicates that the tempo is locked at this rate, from one style to the next. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A  second  double-click  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo by time-clicking with the right mouse button on the TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS to assign the TAP TEMPO function to a key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Frame offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will play only when it receives notes from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is Off, this function gives a metronome (drummer) count-in on the quarter notes of a measure before the arranger starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART. A click on RESTART will immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The functions COUNT IN and RESTART are enabled with either right or left clicks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also assign this button to a control or key by using OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade in, upwards from the zero level to the configured sound level. When the sound level reaches the configured level, the changes to FADE OUT and the button returns to grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger running, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the sound level reaches zero the label changes back to FADE IN, the button becomes grey and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behaviour of the FADE function is identical in a MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, remembers the last chord played in the LEFT part, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When playing a style, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the menu OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[6._ERRORS_AND_WARNINGS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=761</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=761"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:27:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /* ARRANGER STATUS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, you may increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250.  The  orange-red  arc is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO and provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, buy click and sliding the mouse along a vertical axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The small padlock in the centre and the yellow circle indicates that the tempo is locked at this rate, from one style to the next. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A  second  double-click  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo by time-clicking with the right mouse button on the TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS to assign the TAP TEMPO function to a key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Frame offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will play only when it receives notes from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is Off, this function gives a metronome (drummer) count-in on the quarter notes of a measure before the arranger starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART. A click on RESTART will immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The functions COUNT IN and RESTART are enabled with either right or left clicks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also assign this button to a control or key by using OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade in, upwards from the zero level to the configured sound level. When the sound level reaches the configured level, the changes to FADE OUT and the button returns to grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger running, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the sound level reaches zero the label changes back to FADE IN, the button becomes grey and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behaviour of the FADE function is identical in a MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, remembers the last chord played in the LEFT part, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When playing a style, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the menu OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[6._ERRORS_AND_WARNINGS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=760</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=760"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:26:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, you may increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250.  The  orange-red  arc is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO and provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, buy click and sliding the mouse along a vertical axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The small padlock in the centre and the yellow circle indicates that the tempo is locked at this rate, from one style to the next. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A  second  double-click  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo by time-clicking with the right mouse button on the TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS to assign the TAP TEMPO function to a key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Frame offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will play only when it receives notes from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is Off, this function gives a metronome (drummer) count-in on the quarter notes of a measure before the arranger starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART. A click on RESTART will immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The functions COUNT IN and RESTART are enabled with either right or left clicks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also assign this button to a control or key by using OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade in, upwards from the zero level to the configured sound level. When the sound level reaches the configured level, the changes to FADE OUT and the button returns to grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger running, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the sound level reaches zero the label changes back to FADE IN, the button becomes grey and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behaviour of the FADE function is identical in a MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, remembers the last chord played in the LEFT part, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When playing a style, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the menu OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[6._ERRORS_AND_WARNINGS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER&amp;diff=759</id>
		<title>5.11. REALTIME ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER&amp;diff=759"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:26:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /* REAL TIME CONTROL ARRANGER */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== REAL TIME CONTROL ARRANGER ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The  control  of  the  arranger  comes  in  different  views,  depending  on  the  origin  of the  STYLE &lt;br /&gt;
loaded, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig72.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig73.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== INTRO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By  default,  &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  does not select an  &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039;.  An &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039; provides  up  to  three  variations  for  the  introduction from the simpler  (No.  1  or  A)  to  the  richest  (3,  C). The  length  of  the  introduction  is  variable depending  on  the  style,  but  never  less  than  one  measure.  The length  appears  in &#039;&#039;&#039;FRAME A&#039;&#039;&#039;  as a blue horizontal progress bar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With the arranger stopped, select an &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039; pattern (1, 2 or3), and the button turns red.  Press &#039;&#039;&#039;START&#039;&#039;&#039; and the arranger will plays the selected INTRO and then step to &#039;&#039;&#039;VARIATION A&#039;&#039;&#039;, or to any other variation you have previously selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
During your song, you can again replay the INTRO, by simply clicking on the relevant INTRO button.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VARIATION ===&lt;br /&gt;
Depending  to the origin of the style, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; offers up to four &#039;&#039;&#039;Variations&#039;&#039;&#039;: A, B, C and D or RIFF, and up to five &#039;&#039;&#039;Fill In&#039;&#039;&#039;s. These variations each have a different pattern of support in general from simple &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; to the richest &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;.  Some original Ketron styles offer RIFF instead of variation &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;RIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  a  pre  recorded  musical  phrase  of  several  measures.  Up  to  32  steps,  its  length  is indicated by the blue horizontal progress bar in FRAME A, the harmonic grid changes in into an agreement with the note played just  before  entering  this  variation.  This  feature  is  very  popular  for enhancing the musician&#039;s improvisation on a given grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The change over is indicated by the blue colour of the button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FILL IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the style, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides up to three reasons for variations of FILL and BREAK; more for Ketron styles, and up to 5 FILL &lt;br /&gt;
IN for YAMAHA styles. By default, no FILL IN is selected. The buttons change colour upon selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Arranger Off, selecting a FILL or BREAK will start the arranger with that the FILL or BREAK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  framework  is  provided  with  a  button [[File:Fig73a.jpg | 60px]] which  turns  red  when  selected.  This will then automatically start a FILL when changing a VARIATION according to the following arrangement:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle10.jpg | 360px | center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ENDING ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides up to four types of ending, from the simplest to the richest, the length of the ending varies, but is never less than one measure. It appears in FRAME A as the blue horizontal progress bar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : If you start the arranger on an ENDING, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will stop at the end of that pattern. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All  commands  can  be  assigned  by  the  arranger menu:  OPTIONS  -&amp;gt;  CONTROLLERS  -&amp;gt; CONDUCTOR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MARKERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
When &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; reads  a  sequence,  the  control  panel  of  the  arranger  becomes  a series of MARKERS which look like the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig74.jpg | 640px | center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A  &#039;&#039;&#039;MARKER&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  used  for  finding a  precise  position within a MIDI  file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the markers present in the MIDI file, in the area of variations arranger. A clicking on a marker &lt;br /&gt;
button, sets the MIDI file directly to the start position of this marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  the  MIDI  file  is  being  played,  the  position  change  will  take  place  at  the  end  of  the  measure, for a smooth transition. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is very useful if, for example, your require and additional chorus. Click on the marker Chorus, and  at  the  end  of  the  current  measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will chain perfectly to that chorus.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In menu &#039;&#039;&#039;OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS, you may assign up to 15 tags to MIDI buttons, piano keys or PC keys ... (Section MARKERS).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use the functions assigned to VARIATION UP and VARIATION DOWN keys to move through the markers, with the ability to support several steps in a row. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The third option is to use the control usually assigned to variations in key arranger. To do this, use a MIDI file editor and name tags, so that they contain: Intro 1, Into 2 or intro 3, or Ending 1, Ending 2 or 3 or 4, or Main A or B or C or Main Hand D or Fill In 1 or 2 or 3 or Fill In Fill In Break.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if the marker is called &amp;quot;Main C&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Solo Guitar Main  C&amp;quot;,  you  can  go  to  the  position  of  the  marker  by  pressing  the  button  or  pedal assigned to arranger variation 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=758</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=758"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:25:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== THE MIXER PANEL ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The mixer group has 16 &#039;strips&#039;, one for each &#039;track&#039; as in the image below. Each track represents one of the 16 midi channels of the multitimbral midi synthesizer.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Each track can be one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;An arranger track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A midifile track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A left hand track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A right hand track &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;As and example: RIGHT1 below is MIDI Channel 13&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td colspan=4 align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Try a table version&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Strip&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arranger&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MID/KAR Play&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track Name&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI Channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Percussion&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Bass&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums 10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2nd Voice&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;A mixer strip.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Item&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Observations&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;TRACK 3 in PLAYER MODE or SEQUENCE MODE or BASS ARRANGER&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Timbre name assigned to this track.  A click on the track turns it red and the&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;vertical column timbres appears to the left for a possible change of timbre.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Double-click displays the SOUND EDIT window for any changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Right-click to display a popup window.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Volume slider.  Slide up to increase the sound level is increased, slide down to reduce it.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The sound level set by the volume slider.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The sound meter for this mixer strip&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The SOLO button allows you to listen to this one track only.  Coloured green when active.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The MUTE button turns off this track.  Coloured orange when active.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The PAN indicator shows the left/right setting of the track. C for centre, 64L (left) or 63R (right)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;at the extremes.  Adjust the Panning by moving the dark blue button left or right.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A light blue line indicates the position relative to centre.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Shows the name of FX2. Three dashes indicates off. Click on the name to select the FX2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;effect to apply to the sound.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;A rotary control (*) for effect FX1 that controls the amount of the affect to apply to the track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The red arc indicates the level from 0 to 127(**) Black indicates that no effect is applied&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;A rotary control (*) for effect FX2 that controls the amount of the affect to apply to the track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The green arc indicates the level from 0 to 127(**) Black indicates that no effect is applied&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Shows the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039; level (MIDI control 11) as a red line on the meter of each track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Expression acts as a volume control for the track.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Click on the knob and slide up or down to change the setting&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Hover the cursor over the knob to see it&#039;s value.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of the 16 tracks to open the SOUND EDIT window. Once the window is open, a single click on any other track will change the the SOUND EDIT window to that track. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting sounds for the RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4, 2nd VOICE / LEFT 1, 2, 3 tracks allow you to create simple or multi instrumental presets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For those tracks, you have access to the following additional parameters :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the desired note  on the keyboard (the note number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the desired note on the keyboard (which may not be lower than (to the left of) the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity From&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity From&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039; up or down.&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039; up or down.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These tracks allow you, for example, to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set, you can save the preset using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional  for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Special notes for the &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039; track&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the Release Time. You can then save this setting in SAVE STARTUP CONFIG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]] button&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks together (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE), it is easy to create new complex, layered and multi-instrumental presets.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For exemple, click on the RIGHT1 track of the mixer to select the RIGHT1 track, and then select the GRANDPIANO instrument.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the RIGHT2 track, and select the STRINGS instrument.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You now have 2 instruments GRANDPIANO and STRINGS playing together ! Easy ? &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(If you want to remove and empty one track, you need to select the track, and click on the OFF button, on top/left of the SOUND GROUPS (PIANO, E.PIANO, CHROM...))&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust the volume of each track to find the right balance between the PIANO and STRINGS instruments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Not only the volume of each track can be adjusted, but also the following parameters can be tweaked and stored with the SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Instrument MIDI BANK0/BANK32/PROGRAM CHANGE number (By selecting instrument from the vArranger main screen, or INS screen, or entering numbers manually in the SOUND EDIT screen)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- MIDI OUT PORT (Right click on the track. This allow you to play sounds from multiple midi synthesizer and VST instruments together)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Volume&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Track ON / OFF&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Transpose (To play at different octaves)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Pitch Fine tuning (Playing 2 sounds together having a small pitch difference is an interesting effect)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Pan (Place instruments in the stereo field)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- FX1 (Reverb, ... send amount)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- FX2 (Chorus, ... send amount)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- FX3 (Delay, ... send amount)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Key From / Key To (To created splits, and play different instrument in different keyboard range) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Velocity From / Velocity To (To play different instruments if you play the keyboard harder)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Velocity Offset (Usually at 0, but you can add use 127 or any other value if you want to control the volume of the instrument with a separate expression pedal or breath controller)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Use Expression (If you want this track to react to the Expression volume pedal)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Use Sustain (If you want this track to react to the Sustain pedal)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Use Aftertouch (If you want this track to react to the Aftertouch)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Attack / Decay / Sustain / Release  (= Also called ADSR Enveloppe. Nice to add slower attack and release to the sound)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- CutOff Frequency and Resonance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- The Pitch Bend Range&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Portamento ON/OFF - Portamento Time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Monophonic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Harmony options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- And for the Ketron SD2 : WahWahOnOff / WahWahValue / LFO1Speed / LFO1Delay / LFO1Vibrato / LFO2Speed / LFO2Delay / LFO2Sweep / LFO2Tremolo...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu that allows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DRUM MIXER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The DRUM MIXER is something useful to tune the drum sounds of the styles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is 2 kinds of drum mixers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) The PER GROUP DRUM MIXER with the 10 drum mixers groups (Kick, Snare ...)  (In the bottom part of the screen)&lt;br /&gt;
This feature only works with the KETRON SD2 ! (Even the Ketron SD1000 does not react to the drum mixer group messages as the SD2)&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger loads the drum mixer per group included in the Ketron styles.&lt;br /&gt;
This drum mixer is global for all DrumKits on all midi channels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) The PER NOTE DRUM MIXER when you can set the level, reverb, pan etc.... of every individual notes of the drum kit (In the upper part  of the screen)&lt;br /&gt;
You can actually use it for the Ketron SD2, Ketron SD1000, and the vArranger Software Synthesizer.&lt;br /&gt;
Most of Yamaha styles includes some individual drum mixer tuning and are displayed in red, so you can easily see what changes are included within the style.&lt;br /&gt;
You can SAVE DRUM MIXER INDIVIDUAL NOTES with the style too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note, for Ketron SD2 users, there is something very important to know : If one individual drum note has been changed from the default value (127 for volumes, 64 for other controls) then the drum mixer per group will have no more effect on this note ! The individual values will &#039; override &#039;  the per group values.&lt;br /&gt;
So you need to modify the per note values to your taste, or you can set the note to the default value (127 or 64), and then use the drum mixer per group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note, for Ketron SD1000 users. The SD1000 has a round robin feature for drums, so from time to time it triggers another sample for the same key. &lt;br /&gt;
In fact, it plays another note in the same drum kit, that you need to modify too.&lt;br /&gt;
For examples, the snare drum note 38, can trigger the following notes 9,10,11,12,13,38,40. So they all need all to be adjusted to the same value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DrumMixer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group contains 4 volume faders and two groups of effects : &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;, will adjust the overall volume of a MIDI sequence or an audio file, or accomp tracks of a STYLE (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second track named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] will adjust the global level of the LEFT section - Tracks LEFT 1/2/3 (0 to 127). This track, when selected, will allow you to display and select all your USERS multi-sounds to change the preset of the LEFT tracks and will display the button [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to use the LEFT instruments originally present in a Ketron style. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  track named [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] will adjust the global level of the RIGHT section - Tracks RIGHT 1/2/3/4/2nd Voice (0 to 127). This track, when selected, will allow you to display and select all your USERS multi-sounds to change the preset of the RIGHT tracks in a click on only one button. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth fader named MASTER  [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] will act on the overall general master output volume level from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is the actual use of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum reverb level is adjustable chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.9._MY_SONGS&amp;diff=757</id>
		<title>5.9. MY SONGS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.9._MY_SONGS&amp;diff=757"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:25:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== MY SONGS MENU ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MY  SONGS  part  is  very  useful  because  it  allows  performance  to  present  on  the  screen  all necessary to the smooth running of files. It can contain any kind of file: Styles, Registrations, MIDI sequences, karaoke etc..&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig51.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This  framework  contains  12  labels  or  11  banks  over  a  navigation  arrow  for  exceeding  the number of banks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each bank contains the files shown in the left column, which itself can contain multiple pages like the VOICE column (see 5.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a category button MY SONGS (UNPLUGGED, POP, DANCE, BALLAD ...), open Windows Explorer directly pointed at this issue. Nothing is easier to add or modify files. Once  the  changes  are  complete,  it  is  recommended  that  you  click  &#039;Refresh&#039;  to  refresh  the display. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Files can be: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig51a.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The label changes color only when the file is read natively by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to automatically display lyrics (*.  Txt) and especially the score of the piece to play. You just have to show that the file is in a subdirectory &amp;quot;son&amp;quot; of the SONGS folder that named &amp;quot;SCORE&amp;quot; and it bears the same name. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  display  PDF  files  requires  downloading  and  installing  a  Plug  In  available  for  free  here: &lt;br /&gt;
http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 802.0.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In  the  case  of  use  with  a  second  screen,  the  partition  will  automatically  appear  on  the  latter which  can  be  positioned  in  portrait  example  for  comfort  and  readability  mode.  The  score  is displayed and scalable and can be epositioned at will. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
According to its position in the score, the mouse pointer may take various forms:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig51b.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  left  column  shows  the  first  10  &amp;quot;SONGS&amp;quot;  in  the  selected  bank.  By  clicking  with  the  right button on a SONG (a style, or any other file in theleft column), a new menu appears with four users choice: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig52.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MOVE TO ...: Allows you to move to another folder SONG =&amp;gt; select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig53.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;COPY TO ...: Allows you to copy a file to another SONG =&amp;gt; select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig54.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE ...: Deletes a SONG (the files go to the recycle bin)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig55.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;RENAME ...: Rename a SONG (enter a new name for this song)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig56.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These features will bring up a new window with a list of ALL files reports with the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a ROCK.PAT style, there would also be displayed ROCK.PAT2 that contains the information  recorded  by  SAVE  SONG,  but  also  rock.jpg,  ROCK1.JPG,  ROCK2.JPG, ROCK.RTF which are partitions and / or words of this song in the SCORE directory. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
So if you delete, rename or move a SONG, all files related to this SONG (by default they are all selected) will be deleted, renamed or moved automatically at once. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This will greatly facilitate the organization of your directory. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOAD ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to load a compatible file &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; not contained in MY SONG&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; recognizes the following formats:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle6.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;STYLE&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TEXT&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TXT Text &lt;br /&gt;
RTF Rich Text Format &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;IMAGE&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, TIF, TIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AUDIO&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
WAV, MP3, WMA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MIDI&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
MID, KAR &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Cakewalk Instrument Definition File &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;PDF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : (Requires the free plugin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; STARTUP  CONFIG &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This function  allows  you  to find  the  same  set  of  settings  each  time  you  start  the  program.  A window summarizes the settings saved in the defaultconfiguration the next time. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SAVE ===&lt;br /&gt;
The  SAVE  function  saves  the  settings  made  previously,  a  menu  will reppear  with  options &lt;br /&gt;
following backup: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig58.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :  AUTOSTART MIDIFILE &amp;amp; MP3 can play music directlyin the selection of a song, without having to press &#039;&#039;&#039;START.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to save a set of settings with the following options: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig59.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG NAME: &#039;&#039;&#039; Name given to this set of control (&amp;quot;bayonet&amp;quot; in the example)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;FOLDER:&#039;&#039;&#039; Folder which will be saved in all settings namedMY SONGS in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Recording format FOLDER: 2 Numbers in parentheses immediately following the name of the folder (here REGISTRATION) is used to classify banks MY SONGS, the first 4 characters (brackets  +  2  digits)  are  invisible  in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2 &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; and  are  only  used  by  the  software  to  classify  files (FOLDER) in an order chosen by default and can be modified by the user. For the name of a folder &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the first 18 characters on 2 lines maximum. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user checks the backup options according to their needs or all together with SAVE ALL. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With box 12 ASSIGN S CONTROLLERS checked, assigned to &amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot; controllers as a foot control, a MIDI pedal or any other button (QWERTY keyboard or keyboard MASTER) a joystick etc..  Settings  are  stored  for  the  SONG  in  progress  .  This  function  allows,  if  necessary, customize the use of external auditors for each song.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;quot;My Songs Folder...&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  feature  allows  the  background,  for  example  to  create  or  delete  rename  folders  in  the &lt;br /&gt;
working directory  &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; without leaving the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the label [[File:Fig59a.jpg | 150x25px]] &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays  the  Windows  file  manager,  prepositioned in the working directory named default: StylesROM1 (ref. 2). &lt;br /&gt;
This directory is a subfolder of the directory vArranger (ref. 1) created under the root of the hard disk of the computer during the installation &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig60.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  working  directory &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;(StyleROM1)  defaults  to  10  sub-folders  whose  names begin with two numbers  in parentheses as (04) SWING. The figures, invisible in&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Represent  the  fourth  position  in  the  bar  MY  SONGS,  which  allows  a personalized  classification  of  genres  simply  by  changing  the  first  two  numbers while retaining brackets.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The number of sub folders is not limited by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the example in the figure above, the file &#039;&#039;&#039;DANCE (ref. 3) contains a sub-folder in which you can place text, partitions or other files found useful.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When  this  subfolder  is  called  SCORE  (ref.  4)  and  contains  files  with  the  same  name  as  the SONG (ref. 5), eg THIS IS MY LIFE is a partition then it will automatically display the call the &lt;br /&gt;
SONG. THIS IS MY LIFE. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another example can be seen that &amp;quot;hell&amp;quot; is two pages in jpg format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;quot;Refresh&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to refresh the data storedon the computer and used by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; without &lt;br /&gt;
needing  to  restart  the  software.  This  function  is  very  useful  when  the  user  changes  in  the background with MY SONGS FOLDER or with another task, the data working directory &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;quot;Search&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function is very useful when searching for such a lunch kar SONG or on computer disk file. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig61.jpg | 300px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this window, the lens becomes green and the cursor moves ready characters to &lt;br /&gt;
search. As and when the user hits the letters (and  / or numbers) &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
shows the occurrences &lt;br /&gt;
already found the magnifying glass turns red duringthe search and turns green at the end of the process. At this point, double-click the desired title (grayed) the load in drive A. The search engine is very fast, the steps may not be well received. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pressing  the  assigned  to  the  search  function  search function  (SEARCH)  button  activates.  A second press cancels the current search. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LYRICS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig62.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
LYRICS The function displays in a new window the information contained on the track LYRICS MIDI or KAR files or user-defined. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The popup window is floating and resizable. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to disable the automatic display of partitions SCORE file by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY SCORE OF THE SONGS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to disable the automatic display of the words of midi files, by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE LYRICS midi LYRICS The button turns red when this function is active.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== KARAOKE ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig63.jpg | 180px| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
KARAOKE function displays in a new window the information contained on the track KARAOKE MIDI or KAR or user-defined files. &lt;br /&gt;
The popup window is floating and resizable. Also, it is possible to record the start position of the Karaoke window by right-clicking on the window and Karaoke: SAVE WINDOW POSITION&lt;br /&gt;
KARAOKE button turns red when this function is active. &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to disable the automatic display of karaokemidi, by right clicking on the button Karaoke then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE KARAOKE midi&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig64.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.10._MIXER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.8._MY_SOUNDS&amp;diff=756</id>
		<title>5.8. MY SOUNDS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.8._MY_SOUNDS&amp;diff=756"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:24:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== VOICE MENUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig46.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This frame contains two lines, each of 10 Buttons, and will be called MY SOUNDS bars. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The top bar for RIGHT or right hand accordionists can contain up to 10 Buttons chosen from the library VOICE Buttons, these Buttons are directly accessible at any time during play for the lower LEFT or left hand bar ( agreements) for accordion has the same characteristics.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;BY  STYLE  with  activated  (bar  VOICE)  10 Buttons  and  10 Buttons  UPPER  LOWER  can  be associated with each STYLE to be immediately available.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : See also paragraph GROUP MASTER / EFFECTS&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To change the order in which the Buttons are displayed in the MY SOUNDS bar, simply drag the required Button  to a new location in the bar. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This frame also contains a &#039;&#039;&#039;LINK&#039;&#039;&#039; Button that takes the colour RED when the feature is enabled or grey otherwise.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig47.jpg | 640px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This  great  feature  allows  you  automatically to change  the  timbre  of  the  LEFT  and  RIGHT section depending on the variation in play. The Buttons will be the first four bars MY SOUNDS. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;quot;Sounds Drop Here&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
To add to MY SOUNDS, simply drag Button(s) selected from the frame into MY SOUNDS.  You may also load a Button in MY SOUNDS, by right-clicking the Button and then click ADD TO MY SOUNDS. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig49.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete a Button from MY SOUNDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove a Button from MY SOUNDS, right-click the Button and a menu then shows REMOVE. The Button will only be removed from MY SOUNDS. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig49a.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; that there is no confirmation box.  The sound is just removed immediately.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.9._MY_SONGS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.7._VOICE&amp;diff=755</id>
		<title>5.7. VOICE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.7._VOICE&amp;diff=755"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:24:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== VOICE MENUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig41.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The VOICE frame includes 20 sound groups in which timbres are classified by categories of instruments :&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig41a.jpg | 360px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Multitimbral voices consists of one or many timbres to be played simultaneously on the same note&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;monotimbrale voices consist of a single timbre.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Selecting a voice category button will display the list of instruments that belong to this sound group, presented in the vertical list on the right side of the screen, 10 sounds per page.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Use the arrows [[File:Fig41b.jpg | 90px]] to navigate through the various pages available (here, page 2 of 6).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In the narrow bar between the two arrows, when the mouse pointer changes, a mouse click will make the column disappear.  The column will reappear when you select a bank.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Right-click on the label of a timbre to display a context menu similar to the following: [[File:Fig41c.jpg | 150px]]  that offers the possibilities of adding the voice in you &#039; MY SOUNDS &#039; zone or to delete the sound preset. (only for USER voices with a yellow  label).  Removal requires a confirmation (&amp;quot;Are  you  sure  you  want  to permanently delete the selected sound?&amp;quot;) .&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig42.jpg | 360px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The bank DRAWBARS contains timbres for a drawbar organ, the selection of one of them will display a new window in which the settings are displayed for the selected Preset. A button SLOW / FAST allow to select the speed, fast or slow of LESLIE effect.  You  can  assign  this  button  OPTION  / CONTROLLERS.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Note : &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The DRAWBARS screen is controlling the drawbars feature of the Ketron SD2, and is not available for other MIDI sound modules. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig42a.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;You may change those settings by moving the drawbars and tune the percussion of the two harmonics. The result can then be saved as a USER VOICE using the SAVE SOUND procedure (see 5.10.3).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The OFF function individually mutes timbres, of a multi-timbral sound. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig43.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== INS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;INS function INSTRUMENT, at the right-hand end of the VOICE frame, also makes it is easy to select sounds from any MIDI synthesizer.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the list of sounds on your module.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  compatible  with  the  file  format  .INS  (Cakewalk  Instrument  Definition).  Many  of  these &lt;br /&gt;
.INS files are available on the Internet and soon in the download section of our forum.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To activate the INS function, click on LOAD and select an INS file. (Do it only once, as the INS file will remain in memory)&lt;br /&gt;
 This will import the sound bank in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; And displays a new window with a list of sounds.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; It is important to note that the *.Ins files must be present on the hard drive of the computer. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig44.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Column &#039;&#039;&#039;ALTERNATIVES shows alternative sounds from all banks. This is useful if the sounds of other banks are classified according to the GM standard.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To find this window at any time an INS button is added (top right groups of sounds: PIANO, E.PIANO ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig45.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Right click on the button displays the INS files folder on the computer disk. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To change the sound, click on one of the 16 tracks,then click the button INS. The new screen allows you to navigate through all the files installed INS, synths, banks and select one of the 128  sounds  of  the  displayed  bank.  Once  the  INS  window  is open,  you  can  also  click  on  other tracks, to change the sounds.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.8._MY_SOUNDS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.6._RIGHT&amp;diff=754</id>
		<title>5.6. RIGHT</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.6._RIGHT&amp;diff=754"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:24:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== RIGHT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig38.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With no  option  selected,  playing a note on the  right  hand  produces a  single  tone  and  the  left  hand will  be active until the split point (does not apply to the Accordion mode). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2ND VOICE ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig39.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows us to overlay a second instrument for the right hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FULL KEYBOARD ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig40.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this mode, the chord recognition occurs over the entire keyboard. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Although  this  feature  FULL  KEYBOARD indicates  mainly that the  right  side  of  the  keyboard  has  a particular effect, with MIDI accordions in association with MANUAL BASS operates as follows: &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle3.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle4.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Please Note&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; that in this image, the word &#039;&#039;&#039;battery&#039;&#039;&#039; is a failed translation of &#039;&#039;batterie&#039;&#039; ... &#039;&#039;&#039;the drums&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.7._VOICE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.5._BASS&amp;diff=753</id>
		<title>5.5. BASS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.5._BASS&amp;diff=753"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:23:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== BASS FUNCTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to select MANUAL BASS or BASS BASS TO LOWEST NORMAL or when no option is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== NORMAL BASS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig35.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When  the  Arranger  is  running  (START),  the  bass  is  automatically  generated  around  the agreements received in a style unique to each melodic line. &lt;br /&gt;
Arranger OFF (STOP): the bass is played manually&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MANUAL BASS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig36.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The arranger is ON or OFF: the bass is played manually &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== BASS  TO  LOWEST  ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig37.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With  BASS  TO  LOWEST  activated,  the  bass  line  revolves  around  the  lowest  note  that constitutes. Keeps unchanged the melodic bass line structure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For accordion with BASS TO LOWEST option, you play a different bass note, the agreement is replayed with the new bass note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.6._RIGHT]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.4._OCTAVE&amp;diff=752</id>
		<title>5.4. OCTAVE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.4._OCTAVE&amp;diff=752"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:23:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to change the octave of the item selected in the Mixer window. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig34.jpg | 120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.5._BASS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY&amp;diff=751</id>
		<title>5.3. REALTIME DISPLAY</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY&amp;diff=751"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:22:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== MAIN DISPLAY ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This real-time display consists of two frames (Left and Right):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Frame L&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Frame R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Player A&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Player B&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;  the  active  part  is  the  one  whose  letter  is outlined in white (here subframe A is active).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig30.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FRAME L ==&lt;br /&gt;
Frame L shows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the first line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; (By Style), or the instrument on the left hand (ACCORDION MODE) or on the left of the split point for pianists  (SYNSTRGS1  in  the  example).  &lt;br /&gt;
To change the LEFT or RIGHT instrument, clic on the LEFT or RIGHT track to select it (bottom right near the master volume control) and select the instrument from the list&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the second line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; sound group from which the LEFT instrument was selected (STRINGS in the example).&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the third line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;[ACCORDION] if you selected ACCORDION MODE in the MIDI configuration  (Figure 25) or SPLIT (piano/organ keyboard) (Figure 26). &amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig31.jpg |560px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Keyboard Mode&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Split&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates the note where the left/right split is made. By clicking Split you may adjust the split point.&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Accordion Mode&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;The left and right hands are physically separated, so the Split indicator does not appear.&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Organ Mode:&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; VA2 recognizes chords for accompaniment only left from the Split point! From the Split point to the right end of the keys you can play melody!&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The dashes --- after [ACCORDION] or [C3]  indicates the chords recognized and played by the arranger when it is in operation.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; is selected from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI PORTS...&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FRAME R ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frame R shows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the first line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; selected instrument or timbre for the right hand of an accordion or the  right  side of  the  split  point  for  piano and organ  (ROCK  PIANO  in the example above).&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the  second  line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; the sound group of the RIGHT voice (PIANO in the example)&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the third line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; the tone of the second voice (VIOLA in the example).&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PLAYER A ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this area, you can load the styles of different formats (Ketron, YAMAHA and ROLAND), MIDI Sequences (*. Mid), the KARAOKE files (*. Kar). &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Hover the cursor  on  the  name  of  the  SONG  and the parent STYLE is  displayed  in  a  yellow  name  tag, for example:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig33.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PLAYER B ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this area, you can load audio files (*. Mp3, *. Wav, *. Wma). &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The active player has his letter surrounded by a white rectangle.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Also be aware that the play function of Player B can only be operated from an external controller, such as your midi keyboard or Korg NanoKontrol2 or similar.&lt;br /&gt;
Controls can be &amp;lt;Start/Stop&amp;gt; &amp;lt;Crossfader&amp;gt; between Player A and Player B&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.4._OCTAVE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.2._TRANSPOSE&amp;diff=750</id>
		<title>5.2. TRANSPOSE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.2._TRANSPOSE&amp;diff=750"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:22:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This affects all the notes coming out from the MIDIOUT except those of DRUMS and PERC (LIVE DRUMS) channel &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig27.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=749</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=749"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:21:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /* OPTIONS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate - &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can be controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available on the KORG website) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3&#039;rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules. &lt;br /&gt;
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create A Chordsheet =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G.  Then close the window. Launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== CHORD RECOGNITION  VELOCITY THRESHOLD ====&lt;br /&gt;
This slider allows you to filter and NOT consider the played notes with a velocity bellow a certain threshold into the CHORD recognition engine.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists, as unwanted low volumes notes are easily sent when open strings are lightly touched.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The default value is 0 = NO FILTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you raise the threshold slider to value 64, all notes played with a velocity below 64 will not change the chord.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Try to find the maximum value when the chord is correctly changing, without having to play too hard.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====&lt;br /&gt;
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP&#039;s and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The global section (red)&#039;&#039;&#039; allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The DSP section (yellow)&#039;&#039;&#039; allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each of this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets in the list boxes. It is recommended to use this presets. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The track link section (blue)&#039;&#039;&#039;  allows  to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. You have to program each dsp one by one with the paraemters in the yellow section. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. In this case you have to programm only one DSP for both channels. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Workarround for change parameters:&#039;&#039;&#039; Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot figure of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter  on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot figure  for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows also not to save the parameters for each song.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning:&#039;&#039;&#039; The SD1000 has a polyphony of only 128. It can happen that this amount of polyphony will be reached in some songs. Unfortunatly the SD1000 has no intelligent polyphony management and will cut the last instruments. That means the instrument is suddenly disrupted. You have then to set tracks off to avoid the border of 128 polyphony.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== the vARRANGER ² icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.2._TRANSPOSE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=748</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=748"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:19:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /* OPTIONS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate - &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can be controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available on the KORG website) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3&#039;rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules. &lt;br /&gt;
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create A Chordsheet =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G.  Then close the window. Launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== CHORD RECOGNITION  VELOCITY THRESHOLD ====&lt;br /&gt;
This slider allows you to filter and NOT consider the played notes with a velocity bellow a certain threshold into the CHORD recognition engine.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists, as unwanted low volumes notes are easily sent when open strings are lightly touched.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The default value is 0 = NO FILTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you raise the threshold slider to value 64, all notes played with a velocity below 64 will not change the chord.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Try to find the maximum value when the chord is correctly changing, without having to play too hard.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====&lt;br /&gt;
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP&#039;s and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The global section (red)&#039;&#039;&#039; allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The DSP section (yellow)&#039;&#039;&#039; allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each of this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets in the list boxes. It is recommended to use this presets. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The track link section (blue)&#039;&#039;&#039;  allows  to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. You have to program each dsp one by one with the paraemters in the yellow section. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. In this case you have to programm only one DSP for both channels. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Workarround for change parameters:&#039;&#039;&#039; Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot figure of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter  on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot figure  for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows also not to save the parameters for each song.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning:&#039;&#039;&#039; The SD1000 has a polyphony of only 128. It can happen that this amount of polyphony will be reached in some songs. Unfortunatly the SD1000 has no intelligent polyphony management and will cut the last instruments. That means the instrument is suddenly disrupted. You have then to set tracks off to avoid the border of 128 polyphony.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== the vARRANGER ² icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.2._TRANSPOSE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=747</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=747"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:19:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate - &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can be controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available on the KORG website) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3&#039;rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules. &lt;br /&gt;
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create A Chordsheet =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G.  Then close the window. Launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== CHORD RECOGNITION  VELOCITY THRESHOLD ====&lt;br /&gt;
This slider allows you to filter and NOT consider the played notes with a velocity bellow a certain threshold into the CHORD recognition engine.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists, as unwanted low volumes notes are easily sent when open strings are lightly touched.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The default value is 0 = NO FILTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you raise the threshold slider to value 64, all notes played with a velocity below 64 will not change the chord.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Try to find the maximum value when the chord is correctly changing, without having to play too hard.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====&lt;br /&gt;
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP&#039;s and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The global section (red)&#039;&#039;&#039; allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The DSP section (yellow)&#039;&#039;&#039; allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each of this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets in the list boxes. It is recommended to use this presets. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The track link section (blue)&#039;&#039;&#039;  allows  to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. You have to program each dsp one by one with the paraemters in the yellow section. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. In this case you have to programm only one DSP for both channels. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Workarround for change parameters:&#039;&#039;&#039; Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot figure of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter  on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot figure  for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows also not to save the parameters for each song.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning:&#039;&#039;&#039; The SD1000 has a polyphony of only 128. It can happen that this amount of polyphony will be reached in some songs. Unfortunatly the SD1000 has no intelligent polyphony management and will cut the last instruments. That means the instrument is suddenly disrupted. You have then to set tracks off to avoid the border of 128 polyphony.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== the vARRANGER ² icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.2._TRANSPOSE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5._FUNCTIONS_vA2&amp;diff=746</id>
		<title>5. FUNCTIONS vA2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5._FUNCTIONS_vA2&amp;diff=746"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:18:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; starts in full screen mode.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;If you wish a different window size or arrangement, double-click on the background of the main window to resize it.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Right click opens a pop-up window for [[File: save as.jpg |200px]] saving the &amp;quot;User&amp;quot; startup size of the main window.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig1Interfaceva.jpg |700x500px ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM | 5.1. THE MAIN SCREEN]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=4._INSTALLATION&amp;diff=745</id>
		<title>4. INSTALLATION</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=4._INSTALLATION&amp;diff=745"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:18:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==  ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After ordering on the Website at: https://www.varranger.com&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or directly through PayPal at:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:va2paypallogo_150px.jpg|150x150px|link=https://www.paypal.com/webapps/hermes?token=43C84034J1051454E&amp;amp;useraction=commit&amp;amp;mfid=1562138739635_453985dd3da9f#/checkout/guest]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will receive (within 24 hours) the installation instructions and the vArranger2 software download via email.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose between two modes of installation: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) - Installation on your computer (requires no USB, but only works on a single computer). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2) - Installation on your USB Flash Drive (brand Kingston, Sandisk, etc.), so you can use the software on any &lt;br /&gt;
computer by plugging in the USB Flash Drive with Activation Key (Dongle) before launching vArranger. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This choice is final.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[5._FUNCTIONS_vA2]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=3._FEATURES&amp;diff=744</id>
		<title>3. FEATURES</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=3._FEATURES&amp;diff=744"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:17:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides an easy and full control of the sound module: Changing the Tone Multi effect, Sound&lt;br /&gt;
Synthesis, Mixer on 16 MIDI channels, Eastern Range, Organ Drawbars, Splits, Layers, etc. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; includes an special and optimized real-time executive for exceptional musical arranging, with &lt;br /&gt;
sophisticated computer modeling algorithm principles of orchestration and harmony rules. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you play styles in size but Ketron YAMAHA and ROLAND.  Native compatibility is &lt;br /&gt;
complete without  converters. The legendary grooves, wah-wah guitars, mounted bass, brass &lt;br /&gt;
riffs, furious Latin rhythms, guitars&#039; Unplugged ... $$&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled remotely from your MIDI keyboard controllers, or by keyboard&lt;br /&gt;
(wireless?) from your computer. All functions can be assigned in one click! &lt;br /&gt;
Included 400 new sounds (up to 5 layers) of exceptional richness for Ketron SD2 module. &lt;br /&gt;
Further: Possibility to connect two MIDI instruments. Mode split (Split) simple and flexible. &lt;br /&gt;
Total control DRAWBARS, for lovers of the Organs classic draw-bars.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;With &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, your sound module is operated at its maximum. You could never imagined such potential capabilities!&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The development team &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; consists exclusively of passionate musicians who want, above all, &lt;br /&gt;
the realization of a powerful and effective tool for stage and sharing this initiative with other&lt;br /&gt;
professional or amateur musicians throughout the world. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;We are listening to your comments and suggestions to change the software so that it matches &lt;br /&gt;
your needs. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;We help you install and configure the software, and we are committed to getting your  full&lt;br /&gt;
satisfaction.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[4._INSTALLATION]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=2._PRINCIPLE_OF_OPERATION&amp;diff=743</id>
		<title>2. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=2._PRINCIPLE_OF_OPERATION&amp;diff=743"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:17:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Connect your computer to the favorite MIDI instrument (usually a keyboard with a MIDI or &lt;br /&gt;
USB output, but also guitar MIDI, MIDI accordion ...). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect the computer to a MIDI synthesizer (sound generator).  &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; recognizes played chords in &amp;quot;real time&amp;quot; and generates a complete &lt;br /&gt;
orchestration  in  the  chosen  style,  while  allowing  you  full  control  over  all  aspects  of  your &lt;br /&gt;
instrumental performance.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Rather than  developing  software  with  thousands  of  parameters  to  enter  into  menus  and sub-menus, we opted for a more integrated approach.  We decided to offer a ready-to-use solution for  the musician, from beginning to end, for the chain of sound production. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Of course, the software is inherently scalable and we are in constant technological monitoring to &lt;br /&gt;
integrate progressively solutions that really seem workable for the musician. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Our first choice turned to integration of the Ketron SD2 sound module.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Here is one of the possible configurations  for the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig78.jpg |360px] | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[3._FEATURES]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=9._APPENDIX&amp;diff=742</id>
		<title>9. APPENDIX</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=9._APPENDIX&amp;diff=742"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:14:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Non-exhaustive and non-exclusive examples of possible configurations &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Good practice example: multiple controller units and different scene instances &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What is the best way to have two different instances/scenes of controllers set up. Ie. I have Two different kontroller units but need same controlls over VA. Depending on the gig I will use one or the other controller units. (not both together) &lt;br /&gt;
Ie. for set up scene  ONE = NanoKontroller with midi accordion. &lt;br /&gt;
alternative&lt;br /&gt;
Set up TWO = Roland midi controller keyboard with accordion&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Close to the vArranger2.exe program, you have a folder called vArrangerData. Inside this folder, there is a file called vArranger2.ini. Everything about your controllers are inside this file. So, You can set the midi ports and controllers for the accordion setup then save the vArranger2.ini and call it vArranger2-ACC.ini You can set the midi ports and controllers for the keyboard setup then save the vArranger2.ini and call it vArranger2-KEYB.ini Then before running vArranger2, decide witch one you want to use and rename it as vArranger2.ini&lt;br /&gt;
A good solution. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This again shows the brilliant and ongoing versatility of vArranger. However you got me thinking if I could avoid the renaming. Rather than the slight effort of renaming the &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; files for different set ups - here is a suggestion.If I created two new FOLDERS (not files) within the vArrangerdata folder and as you suggested I will name one FOLDER &amp;quot;vArranger2-ACC.ini&amp;quot; and the other FOLDER &amp;quot;vArranger2-KEYB.ini&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
In each folder I would have the relevant version of the same name &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; file for each controllers set up option. &lt;br /&gt;
I would then simply drag the ini file out of the relevant ini folders into the vArranger data folder as needed for each set up. So all that I will need to do is drag the &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; file as needed depending on my set up for that gig. &lt;br /&gt;
I am aware that having two &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; files with the same name will require greater care to avoid confusion. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : In all these configurations, MIDI connections to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; are made via a MIDI interface the number of entries that will be needed (UM-3G Cakewalk by Roland for example - ed) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig78.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig79.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig80.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig81.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig82.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=9._APPENDIX&amp;diff=741</id>
		<title>9. APPENDIX</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=9._APPENDIX&amp;diff=741"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:14:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Non-exhaustive and non-exclusive examples of possible configurations &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Good practice example: multiple controller units and different scene instances &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What is the best way to have two different instances/scenes of controllers set up. Ie. I have Two different kontroller units but need same controlls over VA. Depending on the gig I will use one or the other controller units. (not both together) &lt;br /&gt;
Ie. for set up scene  ONE = NanoKontroller with midi accordion. &lt;br /&gt;
alternative&lt;br /&gt;
Set up TWO = Roland midi controller keyboard with accordion&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Close to the vArranger2.exe program, you have a folder called vArrangerData. Inside this folder, there is a file called vArranger2.ini. Everything about your controllers are inside this file. So, You can set the midi ports and controllers for the accordion setup then save the vArranger2.ini and call it vArranger2-ACC.ini You can set the midi ports and controllers for the keyboard setup then save the vArranger2.ini and call it vArranger2-KEYB.ini Then before running vArranger2, decide witch one you want to use and rename it as vArranger2.ini&lt;br /&gt;
A good solution. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This again shows the brilliant and ongoing versatility of vArranger. However you got me thinking if I could avoid the renaming. Rather than the slight effort of renaming the &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; files for different set ups - here is a suggestion.If I created two new FOLDERS (not files) within the vArrangerdata folder and as you suggested I will name one FOLDER &amp;quot;vArranger2-ACC.ini&amp;quot; and the other FOLDER &amp;quot;vArranger2-KEYB.ini&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
In each folder I would have the relevant version of the same name &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; file for each controllers set up option. &lt;br /&gt;
I would then simply drag the ini file out of the relevant ini folders into the vArranger data folder as needed for each set up. So all that I will need to do is drag the &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; file as needed depending on my set up for that gig. &lt;br /&gt;
I am aware that having two &amp;quot;ini&amp;quot; files with the same name will require greater care to avoid confusion. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : In all these configurations, MIDI connections to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; are made via a MIDI interface the number of entries that will be needed (UM-3G Cakewalk by Roland for example - ed) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig78.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig79.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig80.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig81.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig82.jpg |640px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Main_Page | RETURN TO MAIN PAGE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=8._CONTACT&amp;diff=740</id>
		<title>8. CONTACT</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=8._CONTACT&amp;diff=740"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:13:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Technical Support or Sales information : https://www.varranger.com/contact-us/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[9._APPENDIX | APPENDIX]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=VSTi&amp;diff=739</id>
		<title>VSTi</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=VSTi&amp;diff=739"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:12:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== What is a VST Instrument? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The VST (Virtual Studio Technology) system was developed by Steinberg, to enable a complete studio to be created in software. &lt;br /&gt;
It allows third-party developers to produce real-time effects modules (VST or VST FX), or synth engines that are called VST Instruments (VSTi), that could &#039;plug in&#039; to the host application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So basically, a VSTi is a realtime software synthesizer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nowadays, there are large numbers of third-party companies, that are producing VST instrument plug-ins. Some have a very high sound quality, that can surpass their hardware alternatives, while others are not so good.  Some are expensive, and some are free.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The good news is that vArranger has a VST Host, that can load and play, up to 16 VST Instruments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Requirements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you press a note on your midi keyboard, the VSTi program will generate a sound, using the computer processor (CPU).&lt;br /&gt;
This operation needs to be as fast as possible, (less than 5-15 milliseconds), in order that the player does not experience any latency.&lt;br /&gt;
Some VSTi are doing complex calculations, in a very short time. That&#039;s why using VST&#039;s usually need a &#039;faster&#039; computer. Intel Core series processors (Core i3, Core i5 or Core i7), is a good choice.&lt;br /&gt;
The CPU power is shared between all running programs and processes on the computer. So, it is better to avoid installing unnecessary and unneeded programs on a music computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that some VSTi&#039;s load large quantities of sampled sounds (called &amp;quot;samples&amp;quot;) into the computer&#039;s memory (RAM). In the case of using such a VSTi, you need to have enough RAM installed in your computer. 4GB, 8GB or more is recommended.  More memory, means more flexibility and wider choice between which VSTi&#039;s you can accommodate in memory (RAM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some VST&#039;s play the sounds directly from the Hard Drive (streaming). In such cases, a fast Hard drive 7200RPM or better a SSD disk is essential, otherwise, you will hear some clics, or stuttering.&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s simple -  You need the system to be fast enough and available, in order for the computer to produce sound quickly, and thus eliminate clicks and stuttering or sound breakup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger (the VST host) receives the generated sound, and sends it to the PC sound card driver, then to your PC powered speakers, or headphones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are actually 2 kinds of sound cards.  Some are integrated inside your PC motherboard, and some can be optionally installed. Some sound cards are for professional use, more expensive, and give a better quality sound. Other cards are cheaper, but could still give you decent quality. Some sound cards are simply not good enough.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger can communicate with the sound card using 3 different methods :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;DirectSound&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros:&#039;&#039; Available on every computer, the sound can be used by different programs simultaniously.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; It has too much latency and CAN&#039;T be used for realtime synths. Only for MP3 playback. Sound quality may be less good, as the Windows OS adds a layer of mixing operations, and is not &amp;quot;Bit Perfect&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;WASAPI&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros:&#039;&#039; Low latency. Available on every computer since Windows Vista.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; Not available on windows XP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;ASIO&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros:&#039;&#039; Low latency.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; ASIO drivers are only developed by the manufacturer for top end, professional sound cards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that there is a free software called ASIO4ALL [http://www.asio4all.com/], created by Michael Tippach, that installs a generic ASIO driver, working for every sound card. This is the only solution for low latency audio if you use Windows XP, without a dedicated pro sound card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that sometimes, different access methods may result in a difference in terms of audio quality and stability. In case of problems, it is useful to test the different options: ASIO &amp;lt;=&amp;gt; ASIO4ALL &amp;lt;=&amp;gt; WASAPI, to find the best working driver for your computer.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring vArranger to play VST Instruments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In vArranger, go on OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS to select the audio outputs you want to use for playing VST instruments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:audio_configuration.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see in this example, the ASIO4ALL output has been selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some sound cards have many audio outputs. You will see them all, displayed in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case of an ASIO sound card with multiple audio outputs, a second sub list will appear to select the desired stereo out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see in this example, I have selected &#039;&#039;&#039;VST&#039;&#039;&#039; as the 2nd MIDI OUT port, but you can select VST for the MIDI OUT 1, if the VST instruments will be your main sound source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have also selected the GM2 mode, this works well for VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The VST Rack ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting VST in the MIDI PORTS screen, will add a new button called VST in the vArranger main screen (top right).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this button will show the VST rack, with 16 slots, to load up to 16 VST instruments (VSTi&#039;s). Think of this as having up to 16 hardware synthesizers at your fingertips, at your instant disposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vsti.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- To load a VST Instrument, click on the central and empty zone (2).&lt;br /&gt;
This will allow you to locate the vst that you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
VST plugin files have an extension .DLL&lt;br /&gt;
They are usually installed in a centralized VST folder, but when you install a VST plugin, you have the choice to define a different VST installation folder. So be attentive at this path, so you can find it easily in vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;If you don&#039;t have any VST instruments, you can start by searching on google for free VST instruments.&lt;br /&gt;
This website contains a nice compilation of free VST plugins to download&#039;&#039; [http://lesitedeburnie.free.fr/lalistedeburnie1-en.html]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that vArranger loads &#039;&#039;&#039;32 Bit or 64 Bit VST 2.4 plug ins&#039;&#039;&#039;, in concordance with the version of the vArranger audio engine version currently installed (32 Bit or 64 Bit).  &#039;&#039;If you really need to load 32 Bit and 64 Bit plug ins, together in the same project, you need to install a software like jBridge&#039;&#039; [http://jstuff.wordpress.com/jbridge/] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once loaded, you will see the name of your VST in the VST Rack line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the same zone (2), on the VST name, and you will see the &#039;&#039;&#039;VST EDITOR&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is the graphical screen of the VST, where you can interact with it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note : VST plugins do not always have an editor, but most have one.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exp : NI B4II&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:nib4ii.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- To remove a VST from the rack, click on the [X] (4)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Some plugins have PROGRAMS. They are predefined factory presets. If some are present, you will see the rack line number lightened (1). Clicking on it will allow you to see and select a program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VstPrograms.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VST Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [+] (3) will allow you to see more options for every VST&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VSTOptions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(1) &#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039; : A click on the P letter will show the PROGRAMS of the VST (Same as (1) of the VST Rack)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2) &#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039; : The X will unload the VST (same as (4) of the VST Rack)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(3) &#039;&#039;&#039;BYPASS&#039;&#039;&#039; : This will bypass the VST. If it is an instrument, it will be muted. If is if an effect plugin, this can be useful to listen and compare the sound WITH and WITHOUT the VST treatment. CPU usage decreases while the VST is bypassed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(4) &#039;&#039;&#039;SEND ON MIDI CHANNEL 1&#039;&#039;&#039; : Please read &amp;quot; Monotimbral VS Multitimbral &amp;quot; below&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(5) &#039;&#039;&#039;ALWAYS ON TOP&#039;&#039;&#039; : Check this box, and the VST Editor screen will always be on top of the other windows. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is great for most VSTi. But, some plugins are displaying sometimes a modal message box, waiting for your answer, e.g. &amp;quot;Do you want to load this sound?&amp;quot;  If the VST editor is &amp;quot;always on top&amp;quot;, it can be on top of such messages, and you will think that the VST is hanging when it really is just waiting for your response, for the message that you don&#039;t see. In this case, you need to disable this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;If the VST editor is actually open, you need to close it and open it again to see it Always on top.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(6) &#039;&#039;&#039;SEND TO FX1/FX2/FX3 KNOBS&#039;&#039;&#039; : This allows to adjust the level of effects to add to the VSTi. &#039;&#039;More info on the 3 auxiliary effects circuits on the EFFECTS section.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful as some VSTi does not include an FX section, or you may want to use a very high quality reverb VST plugin/chorus/delay... that will be shared with the vArranger Software Synthesizer AND with the 16 VST instruments AND with the audio input too. This can save some CPU too, not having to compute many reverbs, for every VSTi, and has the advantage to place all the instruments sources in the same virtual &amp;quot;room&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
If you edit the VST options of the FX3, you will be able to adjust the FX1 knob. This is a special feature that allows you to send the FX3 output (usually a delay) to the FX1 engine (usually a reverb). This way, the echoed voices produced by the delay are not dry, but also with some reverb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(7) &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE THE CURRENT PLUGIN STATE AS BANK FXB&#039;&#039;&#039; : This will ask to the VST plugin to save the full bank into a file. Banks usually contains many presets, but every VST plugin decide what they put in the saved file. Some VST use this as a full state saving. Give a name to your saving, and it will go to the list (10)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(8) &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE THE CURRENT PLUGIN STATE AS PRESET FXP&#039;&#039;&#039; : This will ask to the VST plugin to save the current preset, not the full bank into a file. This may be lighter than the FXB saving. Only a test can determine what is the best saving method for every VST, to see what is then recalled, how fast, cutting the sound? and the size of the saved file. The file name will start with a &amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot; to differentiate from bank savings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(9) &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE AS STARTUP CONFIG BANK FXB and PRESET FXP&#039;&#039;&#039; : This is the VST state that will be recalled when starting vArranger&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(10) &#039;&#039;&#039;VST STATES LIST&#039;&#039;&#039; : You can save different states of the plugin for every song or sound, and reload them from the list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(11) &#039;&#039;&#039;LOAD&#039;&#039;&#039; : Load the current selected state in the list. Double clicking on the list does the same&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(12) &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039; : Delete the current selected state in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(13) &#039;&#039;&#039;THE PARAMETERS LIST&#039;&#039;&#039; : VST plugins has some parameters that can be changed to modulate the sound. You can see here the list of all the VST parameters, and their actual value. Parameters are often similar between the VST graphical editor, and this parameter list, but not always, as the VST plugin decides what parameters it want to exposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(14) &#039;&#039;&#039;VALUE&#039;&#039;&#039; : When you select a parameter in the list, this slider will display the current parameter value. It is interesting to see the parameters are bi-directional : changing the parameter value in vArranger will move a knob or a fader in the VST editor, and in the other side, moving a knob in the VST editor, cause the parameters values to change in vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(15) (16) (17) (18) : &#039;&#039;&#039;VST CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039; : You may want to use a physical midi controller to change a VST parameter value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More info here https://www.varranger.com/vforum/index.php?topic=1760.0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Monotimbral VS Multitimbral ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Monotrimbral: Most VST Instruments specialize in one type of sound, for example, analogue synth simulations, Hammond tonewheel organs simulations, Mellotrons, wavetable synths, drums or guitar plugins...&lt;br /&gt;
They are intended to play only ONE instrument at a time. They are listening by default to the MIDI channel 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For such Monotimbrals plugins, Go on the VST OPTIONS screen, and check &#039;&#039;&#039;SEND ON MIDI CHANNEL 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Multibrimbral: This type of VSTi is designed to allow you to play different sounds on different MIDI channels simultaneously. For example, a General MIDI compatible VST Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, you don&#039;t have to check this box. Be careful of the vArranger midi channel assignation. (eg : RIGHT1 Track = Midi Channel 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you plan to use only ONE channel of a multitimbral VSTi, you can check the option to send on midi channel 1, so you don&#039;t need to be careful to set the midi channel inside the plugin. This means you use the multitrimbral VSTi, as a monotrimbral VSTi.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;LIMITATION :&#039;&#039;&#039; When you use the &amp;quot;channel 1&amp;quot; option, you need to be careful that only &#039;&#039;&#039;ONE&#039;&#039;&#039; track is using the same VSTi at any given time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Flexible Routing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every track of vArranger can be routed to a different VST instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RIGHT CLICKING on the track will allow you to select the desired MIDI OUT and/or the VST Instrument that will be used to play this track.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:vstroute.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This routing is saved with the Song (SAVE SONG) and with the Sound (SAVE RIGHT SOUND / SAVE LEFT SOUND)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[8._CONTACT | CONTACT]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=SF2&amp;diff=738</id>
		<title>SF2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=SF2&amp;diff=738"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:11:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== What is the vArranger Software Synthesizer? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger includes a high quality GM2 software synthesizer, with custom SF2/SFZ samples loading, 256 voice high quality sound synthesis. 16 tracks multitimbral. Effects : Reverb, Chorus. 3 auxiliary VST effects + 1 MASTER VST FX...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thanks to the high efficiency technology developed during the last years, vArranger has realized the feat that allows anyone to play music with vArranger, even without any hardware midi module connected to the computer. The sound is generated in realtime by vArranger and sent to the computer audio card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vArranger software synthesizer comes with a basic, but well balanced soundset, with the first goal in mind to work on most computers, even with low capabilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we always want to play with different sounds, the vArranger software synthesizer allows you to load your own sounds, or any free or commercial sounds in SF2 Soundfont format or SFZ format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Requirements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you press a note on your midi keyboard, the software synthesizer will generate a sound, using the computer processor (CPU).&lt;br /&gt;
This operation need to be as fast as possible, (less than 5 - 15 milliseconds), so the player does not feel any latency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the today computers are able to use the vArranger software synthesizer, with an unnoticeable latency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some slow Atom CPU are not fast enough to play in realtime. It&#039;s simple. If  the computer can&#039;t produce sound fast enough , you will hear some clics, or stuttering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;There is a trick to help in this situation, but at a cost to increase the perceived latency. You press the key, and you hear the sound a bit later.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we also share this CPU power with all the running programs, it is better to avoid installing and running unneeded programs on a music computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In live show situation, it is better to set the computer in &#039;Performance Mode&#039; and to set the &#039;Airplane mode&#039; to turn off the background Wifi and Bluetooth communications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second important point to know, is that the vArranger Software Synthesizer loads every sounds, samples in the computer&#039;s memory (RAM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So if you want to use for example 2GB of SF2 samples, you need to have at least 2GB of RAM free to be able to load them.&lt;br /&gt;
The more you have RAM installed on your computer, the more sounds you will be able to load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to use more than 4GB of SF2 sounds, you need to use the 64 bit version of the vArranger Software Synthesizer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vArranger Software Synthesizer sends the generated sound to the PC sound card driver, then to your PC powered speakers, or headphones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are actually 2 kinds of sound cards.  Some are integrated inside your PC motherboard, and some can be optionally installed. They are professional sound cards with sometimes a better sound quality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger can communicate with the sound card using 3 different methods :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;DirectSound&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros :&#039;&#039; Available on every computer, the sound can be used by different programs together.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; It has too much latency and CAN&#039;T be used for realtime synths. Only for MP3 playback. Sound quality may be less good, as the Windows OS adds a layer of mixing operations, and is not &amp;quot;Bit Perfect&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;WASAPI&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros :&#039;&#039; Low latency. Available on every computer since Windows Vista.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; Not available on windows XP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- &#039;&#039;&#039;ASIO&#039;&#039;&#039;   &#039;&#039;Pros :&#039;&#039; Low latency.  &#039;&#039;Cons :&#039;&#039; ASIO drivers are only developed by the manufacturer for the professional sound cards.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that there is a free software called ASIO4ALL [http://www.asio4all.com/], created by Michael Tippach, that installs a generic ASIO driver, working for every sound card. This is the only solution for low latency audio if you use Windows XP, without a dedicated pro sound card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that sometimes, different access methods may result in a difference in term of audio sound or performances. In case of problems, it can be useful to test the different options ASIO &amp;lt;=&amp;gt; ASIO4ALL &amp;lt;=&amp;gt; WASAPI, to find the best working driver for your computer.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring vArranger to play with the Software Synthesizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In vArranger, go on OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS to select the vArranger Software Synthesizer and the audio outputs you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:vASynthPorts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see in this example, it is better to select the &#039;&#039;&#039;vArranger Software Synthesizer&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;GM2 mode&#039;&#039;&#039; as your &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDIOUT1&#039;&#039;&#039; source, and VST or other hardware synth as MIDIOUT2 or MIDIOUT3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, the WASAPI output of the internal laptop sound card has been selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some sound cards have many audio outputs. You will see them all, displayed in this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case of an ASIO sound card with multiples audio outputs, a second sub list will appear to select the desired stereo out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is DONE !&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Loading Custom Samples ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vArranger Software Synthesizer allows you to load your own custom samples, and manage your sound set as you want&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To load new sounds, you need to manually copy &#039;&#039;&#039;one&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;many&#039;&#039;&#039; SF2 or SFZ files inside your &#039;&#039;&#039;\vArrangerData\SOUNDS\SAMPLES\&#039;&#039;&#039; folder. (The vArrangerData folder, close to your vArranger2.exe program icon).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new instruments presets will be automatically loaded at vArranger&#039;s startup, and the sounds will be ready to play and displayed in every sound category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Info&#039;&#039;&#039; : The position of the loaded instruments inside each sound group will depend on the preset number and follows the GM rules : Preset number 0 will go to the PIANO group  Preset number 33 will go to BASS group...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SF2 - SOUNDFONTS Sounds ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must know a bit about the structure of the SF2 files. A SF2 file, can includes one or many PRESETS. Every preset inside the SF2 file, has a unique BANK and PROGRAM number.&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger will send the MIDI BANK and PROGRAM CHANGE message to select the desired sound.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So this is important that every preset inside your different SF2 files has always a unique BANK and PROGRAM number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If two presets are using the same BANK and PROGRAM number, only one of them will be loaded. The other(s) will be ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case of duplicated bank &amp;amp; presets numbers, you can decide which one will be loaded, by renaming the SF2 file. The files are sorted alphabetically by their name and the last file will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example :&lt;br /&gt;
- SF2 file name = &#039;&#039;&#039;MYPIANO&#039;&#039;&#039;.sf2    PRESET BANK=0   PROGRAM= 0&lt;br /&gt;
- SF2 file name = &#039;&#039;&#039;ZMYPIANO&#039;&#039;&#039;.sf2    PRESET BANK=0   PROGRAM= 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, the sound in the second file will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to modify the PRESET NAME, BANK, PROGRAM NUMBERS etc.... you need an SF2 editor.&lt;br /&gt;
You can find a free SF2 editor here : https://polyphone-soundfonts.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;For advanced users :&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The SF2 format only define 127 BANKS (MSB) of 127 presets + one BANK of 127 DRUMKITS.&lt;br /&gt;
To overcome this limitation, and to comply with different styles formats, we have allowed you to define the BANK 32 - LSB, by changing the preset name.&lt;br /&gt;
For example changing the name of preset from ELECTRICBASS to  &#039;&#039;&#039;2@ELECTRICBASS&#039;&#039;&#039;, this preset will be defined in vArranger as having a BANK 32 (LSB) of 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:polyphone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;For advanced users, even more possibilities are available, to define a sound brand, remapping, etc... please contact us.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SFZ Instruments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SFZ format allows a more in depth synthesis than the SF2 format&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A SFZ instrument is composed of one .sfz file (editable with a text editor) and many relative .wav files (that are often placed close to the sfz file, or better, in a dedicated sub-folder for each sfz file) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SFZ format does not define a program change and banks numbers for each instruments, so here is a way to rename your sfz files, so they can be found by vArranger, at a specific program number : &#039;&#039;&#039;msb.lsb.pc@filename.sfz&#039;&#039;&#039;    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So for exp : grandpiano.sfz   become =&amp;gt;  1.2.7@grandpiano.sfz  (bank cc0 = 1 ; bank cc 32 = 2 ; pc = 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The SF2 and SFZ Volumes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default volume of all samples loaded in vArranger is set at 200% (= +6dB)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some sounds are already sampled very hot, and the default volume value of 200 is too much and cause the sound to distort. In this case, setting a value of 100 is recommended&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set a different volume for each SF2 or SFZ file to adjust the relative volumes between files from different sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do that, you need to edit the \vArrangerData\Sounds\Samples\Volumes.txt file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file lists all the current SF2 and SFZ files and their actual volume.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The SOUNDBANKS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have released 4 sound libraries for vArranger, available as separate purchase. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those 4 SOUNDBANKS have been created to allow a better direct compatibility with the 4 style formats available in vArranger&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More sampling sessions are to come. Please contact us for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The EFFECTS system ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The vArranger Software Synthesizer sound can be improved by using effects. REVERB and CHORUS are provided, but you can replace them by your preferred VST plugin&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VSTFX.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(1) Click on the label to load a VST plugin for the REVERB, or to show the VST graphical editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(2) Click on the label to load a VST plugin for the CHORUS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(3) Click on the label to load a VST plugin for the FX3 (DELAY). The &amp;quot;v&amp;quot; is the left of the label will show some plugin presets, if any exists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(4) The &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; in the right of the label will show the VST options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(5) Click on the label to load a VST plugin for the MASTER. A master EQ or final mix multi-band compressor can improve the sound.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 3 VST circuits are auxiliary. This mean that they will add some effect to the current dry sound. That&#039;s why it is important to set in the VST usually : DRY = 0% and WET = 100% (0dB)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MASTER FX is an Insert. So the DRY value should be 100% (0dB) to get no sound amplification or reduction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those effects are also available for the 16 VST instruments and the AUDIO Input.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[VSTi | 8. USING VST INSTRUMENTS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=6._ERRORS_AND_WARNINGS&amp;diff=737</id>
		<title>6. ERRORS AND WARNINGS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=6._ERRORS_AND_WARNINGS&amp;diff=737"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:10:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Please do not select the same MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig77.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SF2 | 7. THE &#039; vArranger Software Synthesizer &#039;]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=736</id>
		<title>5.12. STATUS ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER&amp;diff=736"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:10:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== ARRANGER STATUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig75.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== START ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger stopped, pressing START starts the arranger (right or left click), the button will turn  green  and  the  label  changes  to  STOP. The measure indicator  is  activated, the first of four LEDs indicates highlights (red light), the other, green, show time low. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the Arranger  running,  pressing  STOP  (right  or  left  click) will immediately  stop  the arranger . The button returns to its orange colour and label changes to START (ready for a new start).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== TEMPO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By successively pressing the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; keys, you may increase or decrease the tempo value in steps of + or - 1. The limit values are between 40 and 250.  The  orange-red  arc is  proportional  to  the  value  of  TEMPO and provides coarse adjustment TEMPO, buy click and sliding the mouse along a vertical axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A first double click on the displayed value changes appearance as below:  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The small padlock in the centre and the yellow circle indicates that the tempo is locked at this rate, from one style to the next. This TEMPO LOCK function allows chaining of other styles on the same TEMPO.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A  second  double-click  cancels  the TEMPO LOCK function &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : TAP TEMPO: You can define a new tempo by time-clicking with the right mouse button on the TEMPO button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS to assign the TAP TEMPO function to a key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SYNC ===&lt;br /&gt;
This Frame offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig76a.jpg | 640px  | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; These two options are not mutually  exclusive, checked simultaneously &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will play only when it receives notes from the LEFT section. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== COUNT IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is Off, this function gives a metronome (drummer) count-in on the quarter notes of a measure before the arranger starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When the Arranger is On, the COUNT IN button changes to RESTART. A click on RESTART will immediately reset the arranger on the first beat of the measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The functions COUNT IN and RESTART are enabled with either right or left clicks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also assign this button to a control or key by using OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FADE ===&lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger OFF, pressing FADE IN (the button turns red) causes a fade in, upwards from the zero level to the configured sound level. When the sound level reaches the configured level, the changes to FADE OUT and the button returns to grey.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
•  With the arranger running, pressing FADE OUT (the button turns red) causes a sound fade out from the noise programmed to zero. When the sound level reaches zero the label changes back to FADE IN, the button becomes grey and the Arranger is stopped. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The behaviour of the FADE function is identical in a MIDI sequence or Kar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== HOLD ===&lt;br /&gt;
The HOLD function, when activated, remembers the last chord played in the LEFT part, even after the keys are released.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When playing a style, it keeps the activation of all the accompaniment, bass and drums tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
Otherwise, when the keys are released only the drums tracks keep playing. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ARRANGER STATUS commands are all assignable in the menu OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS, in the TRANSPORT section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[6._ERRORS_AND_WARNINGS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER&amp;diff=735</id>
		<title>5.11. REALTIME ARRANGER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER&amp;diff=735"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:09:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== REAL TIME CONTROL ARRANGER ==&lt;br /&gt;
The  control  of  the  arranger  comes  in  different  views,  depending  on  the  origin  of the  STYLE &lt;br /&gt;
loaded, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig72.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig73.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== INTRO ===&lt;br /&gt;
By  default,  &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  does not select an  &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039;.  An &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039; provides  up  to  three  variations  for  the  introduction from the simpler  (No.  1  or  A)  to  the  richest  (3,  C). The  length  of  the  introduction  is  variable depending  on  the  style,  but  never  less  than  one  measure.  The length  appears  in &#039;&#039;&#039;FRAME A&#039;&#039;&#039;  as a blue horizontal progress bar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With the arranger stopped, select an &#039;&#039;&#039;INTRO&#039;&#039;&#039; pattern (1, 2 or3), and the button turns red.  Press &#039;&#039;&#039;START&#039;&#039;&#039; and the arranger will plays the selected INTRO and then step to &#039;&#039;&#039;VARIATION A&#039;&#039;&#039;, or to any other variation you have previously selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
During your song, you can again replay the INTRO, by simply clicking on the relevant INTRO button.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== VARIATION ===&lt;br /&gt;
Depending  to the origin of the style, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; offers up to four &#039;&#039;&#039;Variations&#039;&#039;&#039;: A, B, C and D or RIFF, and up to five &#039;&#039;&#039;Fill In&#039;&#039;&#039;s. These variations each have a different pattern of support in general from simple &amp;quot;A&amp;quot; to the richest &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;.  Some original Ketron styles offer RIFF instead of variation &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;RIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  a  pre  recorded  musical  phrase  of  several  measures.  Up  to  32  steps,  its  length  is indicated by the blue horizontal progress bar in FRAME A, the harmonic grid changes in into an agreement with the note played just  before  entering  this  variation.  This  feature  is  very  popular  for enhancing the musician&#039;s improvisation on a given grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The change over is indicated by the blue colour of the button. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FILL IN ===&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the style, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides up to three reasons for variations of FILL and BREAK; more for Ketron styles, and up to 5 FILL &lt;br /&gt;
IN for YAMAHA styles. By default, no FILL IN is selected. The buttons change colour upon selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Arranger Off, selecting a FILL or BREAK will start the arranger with that the FILL or BREAK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  framework  is  provided  with  a  button [[File:Fig73a.jpg | 60px]] which  turns  red  when  selected.  This will then automatically start a FILL when changing a VARIATION according to the following arrangement:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle10.jpg | 360px | center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ENDING ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; provides up to four types of ending, from the simplest to the richest, the length of the ending varies, but is never less than one measure. It appears in FRAME A as the blue horizontal progress bar. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : If you start the arranger on an ENDING, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will stop at the end of that pattern. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All  commands  can  be  assigned  by  the  arranger menu:  OPTIONS  -&amp;gt;  CONTROLLERS  -&amp;gt; CONDUCTOR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MARKERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
When &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; reads  a  sequence,  the  control  panel  of  the  arranger  becomes  a series of MARKERS which look like the following.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig74.jpg | 640px | center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A  &#039;&#039;&#039;MARKER&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  used  for  finding a  precise  position within a MIDI  file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the markers present in the MIDI file, in the area of variations arranger. A clicking on a marker &lt;br /&gt;
button, sets the MIDI file directly to the start position of this marker.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  the  MIDI  file  is  being  played,  the  position  change  will  take  place  at  the  end  of  the  measure, for a smooth transition. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is very useful if, for example, your require and additional chorus. Click on the marker Chorus, and  at  the  end  of  the  current  measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; will chain perfectly to that chorus.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In menu &#039;&#039;&#039;OPTIONS -&amp;gt; CONTROLLERS, you may assign up to 15 tags to MIDI buttons, piano keys or PC keys ... (Section MARKERS).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may also use the functions assigned to VARIATION UP and VARIATION DOWN keys to move through the markers, with the ability to support several steps in a row. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The third option is to use the control usually assigned to variations in key arranger. To do this, use a MIDI file editor and name tags, so that they contain: Intro 1, Into 2 or intro 3, or Ending 1, Ending 2 or 3 or 4, or Main A or B or C or Main Hand D or Fill In 1 or 2 or 3 or Fill In Fill In Break.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if the marker is called &amp;quot;Main C&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Solo Guitar Main  C&amp;quot;,  you  can  go  to  the  position  of  the  marker  by  pressing  the  button  or  pedal assigned to arranger variation 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.12._STATUS_ARRANGER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=734</id>
		<title>5.10. MIXER</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.10._MIXER&amp;diff=734"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:08:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== THE MIXER PANEL ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The mixer group has 16 &#039;strips&#039;, one for each &#039;track&#039; as in the image below. Each track represents one of the 16 midi channels of the multitimbral midi synthesizer.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Each track can be one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;An arranger track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A midifile track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A left hand track&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A right hand track &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;As and example: RIGHT1 below is MIDI Channel 13&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td colspan=4 align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Try a table version&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Strip&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Arranger&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MID/KAR Play&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Number&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track Name&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;MIDI Channel&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Percussion&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Bass&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Accomp 5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Drums 10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Left 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 13&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 14&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Right 4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 15&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2nd Voice&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Track 16&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;A mixer strip.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[File:Fig65.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th  align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Item&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;th&amp;gt;Observations&amp;lt;/th&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;TRACK 3 in PLAYER MODE or SEQUENCE MODE or BASS ARRANGER&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Timbre name assigned to this track.  A click on the track turns it red and the&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;vertical column timbres appears to the left for a possible change of timbre.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Double-click displays the SOUND EDIT window for any changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Right-click to display a popup window.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Volume slider.  Slide up to increase the sound level is increased, slide down to reduce it.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The sound level set by the volume slider.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The sound meter for this mixer strip&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The SOLO button allows you to listen to this one track only.  Coloured green when active.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The MUTE button turns off this track.  Coloured orange when active.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The PAN indicator shows the left/right setting of the track. C for centre, 64L (left) or 63R (right)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;at the extremes.  Adjust the Panning by moving the dark blue button left or right.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A light blue line indicates the position relative to centre.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Shows the name of FX2. Three dashes indicates off. Click on the name to select the FX2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;effect to apply to the sound.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;A rotary control (*) for effect FX1 that controls the amount of the affect to apply to the track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The red arc indicates the level from 0 to 127(**) Black indicates that no effect is applied&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;11&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;A rotary control (*) for effect FX2 that controls the amount of the affect to apply to the track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The green arc indicates the level from 0 to 127(**) Black indicates that no effect is applied&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Shows the &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039; level (MIDI control 11) as a red line on the meter of each track.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Expression acts as a volume control for the track.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Click on the knob and slide up or down to change the setting&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;**&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Hover the cursor over the knob to see it&#039;s value.&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  SECTION SOUND EDIT ==&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on one of the 16 tracks to open the SOUND EDIT window. Once the window is open, a single click on any other track will change the the SOUND EDIT window to that track. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig66.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting sounds for the RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4, 2nd VOICE / LEFT 1, 2, 3 tracks allow you to create simple or multi instrumental presets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For those tracks, you have access to the following additional parameters :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;A keyboard play area:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; allow you to select the range of keys(notes) for an action.&lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the desired note  on the keyboard (the note number will be displayed.). &lt;br /&gt;
::: Define the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key To&#039;&#039;&#039; note by clicking on the displayed value and then play the desired note on the keyboard (which may not be lower than (to the left of) the &#039;&#039;&#039;Key From&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A velocity range:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity From&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will be generated. A low value corresponds to &amp;quot;light&amp;quot; the maximum is &amp;quot;Sforzando.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity To&#039;&#039;&#039; Sets the value of the strike force from which the note will no longer generated. This value may not be less than &#039;&#039;&#039;Velocity From&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;An octave change.&#039;&#039;&#039; up or down.&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;A transposition in semitones.&#039;&#039;&#039; up or down.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These tracks allow you, for example, to produce a different tone and a different velocity according to the octave played&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig67.jpg | 720px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once these parameters are set, you can save the preset using &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SOUND&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Additional  for the &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;PERC&#039;&#039;&#039; tracks only&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::Right-click on the DRUM or PERC track and select &#039;&#039;&#039;DRUM MIXER...&#039;&#039;&#039; to access the additional extra settings for the percussion tracks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Special notes for the &#039;&#039;&#039;BASS&#039;&#039;&#039; track&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You may save the MANUAL BASS SUSTAIN. To do this, select Manual Bass, double click on the bass track, and change the value of the Release Time. You can then save this setting in SAVE STARTUP CONFIG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAVE SOUND ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SAVE RIGHT SOUND is available from the [[File:Fig68a.jpg | 120px]] button&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By combining up to 5 tracks together (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, 4 and 2nd VOICE), it is easy to create new complex, layered and multi-instrumental presets.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For exemple, click on the RIGHT1 track of the mixer to select the RIGHT1 track, and then select the GRANDPIANO instrument.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the RIGHT2 track, and select the STRINGS instrument.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You now have 2 instruments GRANDPIANO and STRINGS playing together ! Easy ? &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(If you want to remove and empty one track, you need to select the track, and click on the OFF button, on top/left of the SOUND GROUPS (PIANO, E.PIANO, CHROM...))&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust the volume of each track to find the right balance between the PIANO and STRINGS instruments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Not only the volume of each track can be adjusted, but also the following parameters can be tweaked and stored with the SAVE RIGHT SOUND: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Instrument MIDI BANK0/BANK32/PROGRAM CHANGE number (By selecting instrument from the vArranger main screen, or INS screen, or entering numbers manually in the SOUND EDIT screen)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- MIDI OUT PORT (Right click on the track. This allow you to play sounds from multiple midi synthesizer and VST instruments together)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Volume&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Track ON / OFF&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Transpose (To play at different octaves)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Pitch Fine tuning (Playing 2 sounds together having a small pitch difference is an interesting effect)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Pan (Place instruments in the stereo field)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- FX1 (Reverb, ... send amount)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- FX2 (Chorus, ... send amount)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- FX3 (Delay, ... send amount)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Key From / Key To (To created splits, and play different instrument in different keyboard range) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Velocity From / Velocity To (To play different instruments if you play the keyboard harder)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Velocity Offset (Usually at 0, but you can add use 127 or any other value if you want to control the volume of the instrument with a separate expression pedal or breath controller)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Use Expression (If you want this track to react to the Expression volume pedal)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Use Sustain (If you want this track to react to the Sustain pedal)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Use Aftertouch (If you want this track to react to the Aftertouch)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Attack / Decay / Sustain / Release  (= Also called ADSR Enveloppe. Nice to add slower attack and release to the sound)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- CutOff Frequency and Resonance&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- The Pitch Bend Range&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Portamento ON/OFF - Portamento Time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Monophonic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- Harmony options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- And for the Ketron SD2 : WahWahOnOff / WahWahValue / LFO1Speed / LFO1Delay / LFO1Vibrato / LFO2Speed / LFO2Delay / LFO2Sweep / LFO2Tremolo...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CONTEXT MENU TRACK ==&lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a track displays a context menu that allows the following selections: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, right click ACCOMP4:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig69.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  SEND TO MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  menu  allows  you  to  route  MIDI  track  this  information  to  multiple  MIDI  outputs,  these &lt;br /&gt;
choices are not mutually exclusive. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : It is possible to use multiple MIDI interfaces with the same names of MIDI ports.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SOUND EDIT ...  ===&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 5.10.2 SOUND EDIT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DRUM MIXER ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The DRUM MIXER is something useful to tune the drum sounds of the styles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is 2 kinds of drum mixers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) The PER GROUP DRUM MIXER with the 10 drum mixers groups (Kick, Snare ...)  (In the bottom part of the screen)&lt;br /&gt;
This feature only works with the KETRON SD2 ! (Even the Ketron SD1000 does not react to the drum mixer group messages as the SD2)&lt;br /&gt;
vArranger loads the drum mixer per group included in the Ketron styles.&lt;br /&gt;
This drum mixer is global for all DrumKits on all midi channels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) The PER NOTE DRUM MIXER when you can set the level, reverb, pan etc.... of every individual notes of the drum kit (In the upper part  of the screen)&lt;br /&gt;
You can actually use it for the Ketron SD2, Ketron SD1000, and the vArranger Software Synthesizer.&lt;br /&gt;
Most of Yamaha styles includes some individual drum mixer tuning and are displayed in red, so you can easily see what changes are included within the style.&lt;br /&gt;
You can SAVE DRUM MIXER INDIVIDUAL NOTES with the style too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note, for Ketron SD2 users, there is something very important to know : If one individual drum note has been changed from the default value (127 for volumes, 64 for other controls) then the drum mixer per group will have no more effect on this note ! The individual values will &#039; override &#039;  the per group values.&lt;br /&gt;
So you need to modify the per note values to your taste, or you can set the note to the default value (127 or 64), and then use the drum mixer per group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note, for Ketron SD1000 users. The SD1000 has a round robin feature for drums, so from time to time it triggers another sample for the same key. &lt;br /&gt;
In fact, it plays another note in the same drum kit, that you need to modify too.&lt;br /&gt;
For examples, the snare drum note 38, can trigger the following notes 9,10,11,12,13,38,40. So they all need all to be adjusted to the same value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DrumMixer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== STYLE MIXER ... ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  command  displays  summary  screen  settings  current  style  for  each  track,  and  each &lt;br /&gt;
variation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig70.jpg |780| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GROUP MASTER/EFFECTS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig71.jpg |240| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This group contains 4 volume faders and two groups of effects : &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first track named &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;, will adjust the overall volume of a MIDI sequence or an audio file, or accomp tracks of a STYLE (0-127) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second track named [[File:Fig71b.jpg | 40px ]] will adjust the global level of the LEFT section - Tracks LEFT 1/2/3 (0 to 127). This track, when selected, will allow you to display and select all your USERS multi-sounds to change the preset of the LEFT tracks and will display the button [[File:Fig71c.jpg | 90px ]] in VOICE. This feature allows you to use the LEFT instruments originally present in a Ketron style. A right-click displays &lt;br /&gt;
the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  third  track named [[File:Fig71d.jpg | 50px ]] will adjust the global level of the RIGHT section - Tracks RIGHT 1/2/3/4/2nd Voice (0 to 127). This track, when selected, will allow you to display and select all your USERS multi-sounds to change the preset of the RIGHT tracks in a click on only one button. A right-click displays the popup menu cf. 5.10.4. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth fader named MASTER  [[File:Fig71e.jpg | 50px ]] will act on the overall general master output volume level from 0 to 127.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Above, another digital indicator shows white numerals on a black background, it is the actual use of polyphony, &lt;br /&gt;
in other words, the number of notes &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot; sent to the sound module. This allows for example, &lt;br /&gt;
whether &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is receiving MIDI data from the device connected to MIDI IN. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  first  group  of  effects  named  FX1-REVERB  can  select  a  reverb  type  from  eight  types  of &lt;br /&gt;
which OFF (no reverb). The choice is made by clicking on the name of the REVERB in use, a &lt;br /&gt;
drop-down list displays the different reverbs available. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By  clicking  on  the  bottom  of  the  window &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It  clears  the  combo  box  without  applying  the &lt;br /&gt;
changes. &lt;br /&gt;
The maximum reverb level is adjustable chosen in another drop-down list of values: 0 to 16. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The second effect group named FX2 can choose different types of CHORUS DELAY DISTO to &lt;br /&gt;
be applied to different tracks &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Eight different types are available including an  OFF for all &lt;br /&gt;
three FX2 effects. By clicking on the bottom of thewindow &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It clears the combo box without &lt;br /&gt;
applying the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.11._REALTIME_ARRANGER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.9._MY_SONGS&amp;diff=733</id>
		<title>5.9. MY SONGS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.9._MY_SONGS&amp;diff=733"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:08:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== MY SONGS MENU ==&lt;br /&gt;
MY  SONGS  part  is  very  useful  because  it  allows  performance  to  present  on  the  screen  all necessary to the smooth running of files. It can contain any kind of file: Styles, Registrations, MIDI sequences, karaoke etc..&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig51.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This  framework  contains  12  labels  or  11  banks  over  a  navigation  arrow  for  exceeding  the number of banks. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each bank contains the files shown in the left column, which itself can contain multiple pages like the VOICE column (see 5.8)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Right click on a category button MY SONGS (UNPLUGGED, POP, DANCE, BALLAD ...), open Windows Explorer directly pointed at this issue. Nothing is easier to add or modify files. Once  the  changes  are  complete,  it  is  recommended  that  you  click  &#039;Refresh&#039;  to  refresh  the display. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Files can be: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig51a.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The label changes color only when the file is read natively by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to automatically display lyrics (*.  Txt) and especially the score of the piece to play. You just have to show that the file is in a subdirectory &amp;quot;son&amp;quot; of the SONGS folder that named &amp;quot;SCORE&amp;quot; and it bears the same name. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  display  PDF  files  requires  downloading  and  installing  a  Plug  In  available  for  free  here: &lt;br /&gt;
http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 802.0.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In  the  case  of  use  with  a  second  screen,  the  partition  will  automatically  appear  on  the  latter which  can  be  positioned  in  portrait  example  for  comfort  and  readability  mode.  The  score  is displayed and scalable and can be epositioned at will. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
According to its position in the score, the mouse pointer may take various forms:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig51b.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  left  column  shows  the  first  10  &amp;quot;SONGS&amp;quot;  in  the  selected  bank.  By  clicking  with  the  right button on a SONG (a style, or any other file in theleft column), a new menu appears with four users choice: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig52.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MOVE TO ...: Allows you to move to another folder SONG =&amp;gt; select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig53.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;COPY TO ...: Allows you to copy a file to another SONG =&amp;gt; select the destination folder from the list or enter a new folder name &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig54.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE ...: Deletes a SONG (the files go to the recycle bin)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig55.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;RENAME ...: Rename a SONG (enter a new name for this song)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig56.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These features will bring up a new window with a list of ALL files reports with the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a ROCK.PAT style, there would also be displayed ROCK.PAT2 that contains the information  recorded  by  SAVE  SONG,  but  also  rock.jpg,  ROCK1.JPG,  ROCK2.JPG, ROCK.RTF which are partitions and / or words of this song in the SCORE directory. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
So if you delete, rename or move a SONG, all files related to this SONG (by default they are all selected) will be deleted, renamed or moved automatically at once. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This will greatly facilitate the organization of your directory. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== LOAD ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to load a compatible file &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; not contained in MY SONG&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; recognizes the following formats:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle6.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;STYLE&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TEXT&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TXT Text &lt;br /&gt;
RTF Rich Text Format &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;IMAGE&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, TIF, TIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AUDIO&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
WAV, MP3, WMA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MIDI&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
MID, KAR &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Cakewalk Instrument Definition File &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;PDF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : (Requires the free plugin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; STARTUP  CONFIG &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This function  allows  you  to find  the  same  set  of  settings  each  time  you  start  the  program.  A window summarizes the settings saved in the defaultconfiguration the next time. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SAVE ===&lt;br /&gt;
The  SAVE  function  saves  the  settings  made  previously,  a  menu  will reppear  with  options &lt;br /&gt;
following backup: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig58.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :  AUTOSTART MIDIFILE &amp;amp; MP3 can play music directlyin the selection of a song, without having to press &#039;&#039;&#039;START.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to save a set of settings with the following options: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig59.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG NAME: &#039;&#039;&#039; Name given to this set of control (&amp;quot;bayonet&amp;quot; in the example)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;FOLDER:&#039;&#039;&#039; Folder which will be saved in all settings namedMY SONGS in the example.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Recording format FOLDER: 2 Numbers in parentheses immediately following the name of the folder (here REGISTRATION) is used to classify banks MY SONGS, the first 4 characters (brackets  +  2  digits)  are  invisible  in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2 &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; and  are  only  used  by  the  software  to  classify  files (FOLDER) in an order chosen by default and can be modified by the user. For the name of a folder &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the first 18 characters on 2 lines maximum. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The user checks the backup options according to their needs or all together with SAVE ALL. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With box 12 ASSIGN S CONTROLLERS checked, assigned to &amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot; controllers as a foot control, a MIDI pedal or any other button (QWERTY keyboard or keyboard MASTER) a joystick etc..  Settings  are  stored  for  the  SONG  in  progress  .  This  function  allows,  if  necessary, customize the use of external auditors for each song.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;quot;My Songs Folder...&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This  feature  allows  the  background,  for  example  to  create  or  delete  rename  folders  in  the &lt;br /&gt;
working directory  &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; without leaving the software.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the label [[File:Fig59a.jpg | 150x25px]] &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays  the  Windows  file  manager,  prepositioned in the working directory named default: StylesROM1 (ref. 2). &lt;br /&gt;
This directory is a subfolder of the directory vArranger (ref. 1) created under the root of the hard disk of the computer during the installation &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig60.jpg | 480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The  working  directory &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;(StyleROM1)  defaults  to  10  sub-folders  whose  names begin with two numbers  in parentheses as (04) SWING. The figures, invisible in&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Represent  the  fourth  position  in  the  bar  MY  SONGS,  which  allows  a personalized  classification  of  genres  simply  by  changing  the  first  two  numbers while retaining brackets.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The number of sub folders is not limited by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the example in the figure above, the file &#039;&#039;&#039;DANCE (ref. 3) contains a sub-folder in which you can place text, partitions or other files found useful.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When  this  subfolder  is  called  SCORE  (ref.  4)  and  contains  files  with  the  same  name  as  the SONG (ref. 5), eg THIS IS MY LIFE is a partition then it will automatically display the call the &lt;br /&gt;
SONG. THIS IS MY LIFE. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another example can be seen that &amp;quot;hell&amp;quot; is two pages in jpg format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;quot;Refresh&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to refresh the data storedon the computer and used by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; without &lt;br /&gt;
needing  to  restart  the  software.  This  function  is  very  useful  when  the  user  changes  in  the background with MY SONGS FOLDER or with another task, the data working directory &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;quot;Search&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function is very useful when searching for such a lunch kar SONG or on computer disk file. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig61.jpg | 300px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this window, the lens becomes green and the cursor moves ready characters to &lt;br /&gt;
search. As and when the user hits the letters (and  / or numbers) &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
shows the occurrences &lt;br /&gt;
already found the magnifying glass turns red duringthe search and turns green at the end of the process. At this point, double-click the desired title (grayed) the load in drive A. The search engine is very fast, the steps may not be well received. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pressing  the  assigned  to  the  search  function  search function  (SEARCH)  button  activates.  A second press cancels the current search. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LYRICS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig62.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
LYRICS The function displays in a new window the information contained on the track LYRICS MIDI or KAR files or user-defined. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The popup window is floating and resizable. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to disable the automatic display of partitions SCORE file by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY SCORE OF THE SONGS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ability to disable the automatic display of the words of midi files, by right clicking on the Lyrics button, then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE LYRICS midi LYRICS The button turns red when this function is active.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== KARAOKE ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig63.jpg | 180px| center]]&lt;br /&gt;
KARAOKE function displays in a new window the information contained on the track KARAOKE MIDI or KAR or user-defined files. &lt;br /&gt;
The popup window is floating and resizable. Also, it is possible to record the start position of the Karaoke window by right-clicking on the window and Karaoke: SAVE WINDOW POSITION&lt;br /&gt;
KARAOKE button turns red when this function is active. &lt;br /&gt;
Ability to disable the automatic display of karaokemidi, by right clicking on the button Karaoke then uncheck DISPLAY OF THE KARAOKE midi&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig64.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.10._MIXER]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.8._MY_SOUNDS&amp;diff=732</id>
		<title>5.8. MY SOUNDS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.8._MY_SOUNDS&amp;diff=732"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:07:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== VOICE MENUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig46.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This frame contains two lines, each of 10 Buttons, and will be called MY SOUNDS bars. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The top bar for RIGHT or right hand accordionists can contain up to 10 Buttons chosen from the library VOICE Buttons, these Buttons are directly accessible at any time during play for the lower LEFT or left hand bar ( agreements) for accordion has the same characteristics.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;BY  STYLE  with  activated  (bar  VOICE)  10 Buttons  and  10 Buttons  UPPER  LOWER  can  be associated with each STYLE to be immediately available.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : See also paragraph GROUP MASTER / EFFECTS&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To change the order in which the Buttons are displayed in the MY SOUNDS bar, simply drag the required Button  to a new location in the bar. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This frame also contains a &#039;&#039;&#039;LINK&#039;&#039;&#039; Button that takes the colour RED when the feature is enabled or grey otherwise.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig47.jpg | 640px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This  great  feature  allows  you  automatically to change  the  timbre  of  the  LEFT  and  RIGHT section depending on the variation in play. The Buttons will be the first four bars MY SOUNDS. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &amp;quot;Sounds Drop Here&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
To add to MY SOUNDS, simply drag Button(s) selected from the frame into MY SOUNDS.  You may also load a Button in MY SOUNDS, by right-clicking the Button and then click ADD TO MY SOUNDS. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig49.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete a Button from MY SOUNDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To remove a Button from MY SOUNDS, right-click the Button and a menu then shows REMOVE. The Button will only be removed from MY SOUNDS. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig49a.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; that there is no confirmation box.  The sound is just removed immediately.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.9._MY_SONGS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.7._VOICE&amp;diff=731</id>
		<title>5.7. VOICE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.7._VOICE&amp;diff=731"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:06:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== VOICE MENUS ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig41.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The VOICE frame includes 20 sound groups in which timbres are classified by categories of instruments :&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig41a.jpg | 360px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Multitimbral voices consists of one or many timbres to be played simultaneously on the same note&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;monotimbrale voices consist of a single timbre.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Selecting a voice category button will display the list of instruments that belong to this sound group, presented in the vertical list on the right side of the screen, 10 sounds per page.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Use the arrows [[File:Fig41b.jpg | 90px]] to navigate through the various pages available (here, page 2 of 6).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In the narrow bar between the two arrows, when the mouse pointer changes, a mouse click will make the column disappear.  The column will reappear when you select a bank.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Right-click on the label of a timbre to display a context menu similar to the following: [[File:Fig41c.jpg | 150px]]  that offers the possibilities of adding the voice in you &#039; MY SOUNDS &#039; zone or to delete the sound preset. (only for USER voices with a yellow  label).  Removal requires a confirmation (&amp;quot;Are  you  sure  you  want  to permanently delete the selected sound?&amp;quot;) .&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig42.jpg | 360px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The bank DRAWBARS contains timbres for a drawbar organ, the selection of one of them will display a new window in which the settings are displayed for the selected Preset. A button SLOW / FAST allow to select the speed, fast or slow of LESLIE effect.  You  can  assign  this  button  OPTION  / CONTROLLERS.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Note : &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The DRAWBARS screen is controlling the drawbars feature of the Ketron SD2, and is not available for other MIDI sound modules. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig42a.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;You may change those settings by moving the drawbars and tune the percussion of the two harmonics. The result can then be saved as a USER VOICE using the SAVE SOUND procedure (see 5.10.3).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The OFF function individually mutes timbres, of a multi-timbral sound. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig43.jpg | 360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== INS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;INS function INSTRUMENT, at the right-hand end of the VOICE frame, also makes it is easy to select sounds from any MIDI synthesizer.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; displays the list of sounds on your module.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  is  compatible  with  the  file  format  .INS  (Cakewalk  Instrument  Definition).  Many  of  these &lt;br /&gt;
.INS files are available on the Internet and soon in the download section of our forum.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To activate the INS function, click on LOAD and select an INS file. (Do it only once, as the INS file will remain in memory)&lt;br /&gt;
 This will import the sound bank in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; And displays a new window with a list of sounds.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; It is important to note that the *.Ins files must be present on the hard drive of the computer. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig44.jpg | 560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Column &#039;&#039;&#039;ALTERNATIVES shows alternative sounds from all banks. This is useful if the sounds of other banks are classified according to the GM standard.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To find this window at any time an INS button is added (top right groups of sounds: PIANO, E.PIANO ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig45.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Right click on the button displays the INS files folder on the computer disk. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;To change the sound, click on one of the 16 tracks,then click the button INS. The new screen allows you to navigate through all the files installed INS, synths, banks and select one of the 128  sounds  of  the  displayed  bank.  Once  the  INS  window  is open,  you  can  also  click  on  other tracks, to change the sounds.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.8._MY_SOUNDS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.6._RIGHT&amp;diff=730</id>
		<title>5.6. RIGHT</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.6._RIGHT&amp;diff=730"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:06:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== RIGHT ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig38.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With no  option  selected,  playing a note on the  right  hand  produces a  single  tone  and  the  left  hand will  be active until the split point (does not apply to the Accordion mode). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2ND VOICE ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig39.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows us to overlay a second instrument for the right hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FULL KEYBOARD ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig40.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this mode, the chord recognition occurs over the entire keyboard. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Although  this  feature  FULL  KEYBOARD indicates  mainly that the  right  side  of  the  keyboard  has  a particular effect, with MIDI accordions in association with MANUAL BASS operates as follows: &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle3.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle4.jpg | 640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Please Note&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; that in this image, the word &#039;&#039;&#039;battery&#039;&#039;&#039; is a failed translation of &#039;&#039;batterie&#039;&#039; ... &#039;&#039;&#039;the drums&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.7._VOICE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.5._BASS&amp;diff=729</id>
		<title>5.5. BASS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.5._BASS&amp;diff=729"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:05:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== BASS FUNCTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to select MANUAL BASS or BASS BASS TO LOWEST NORMAL or when no option is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== NORMAL BASS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig35.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When  the  Arranger  is  running  (START),  the  bass  is  automatically  generated  around  the agreements received in a style unique to each melodic line. &lt;br /&gt;
Arranger OFF (STOP): the bass is played manually&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MANUAL BASS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig36.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The arranger is ON or OFF: the bass is played manually &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== BASS  TO  LOWEST  ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig37.jpg | 180px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With  BASS  TO  LOWEST  activated,  the  bass  line  revolves  around  the  lowest  note  that constitutes. Keeps unchanged the melodic bass line structure. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For accordion with BASS TO LOWEST option, you play a different bass note, the agreement is replayed with the new bass note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.6._RIGHT]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.4._OCTAVE&amp;diff=728</id>
		<title>5.4. OCTAVE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.4._OCTAVE&amp;diff=728"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:05:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This function allows you to change the octave of the item selected in the Mixer window. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig34.jpg | 120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.5._BASS]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY&amp;diff=727</id>
		<title>5.3. REALTIME DISPLAY</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY&amp;diff=727"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:04:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== MAIN DISPLAY ==&lt;br /&gt;
This real-time display consists of two frames (Left and Right):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Frame L&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Frame R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Player A&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Player B&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;  the  active  part  is  the  one  whose  letter  is outlined in white (here subframe A is active).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig30.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FRAME L ==&lt;br /&gt;
Frame L shows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the first line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; (By Style), or the instrument on the left hand (ACCORDION MODE) or on the left of the split point for pianists  (SYNSTRGS1  in  the  example).  &lt;br /&gt;
To change the LEFT or RIGHT instrument, clic on the LEFT or RIGHT track to select it (bottom right near the master volume control) and select the instrument from the list&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the second line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; sound group from which the LEFT instrument was selected (STRINGS in the example).&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt; In the third line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;[ACCORDION] if you selected ACCORDION MODE in the MIDI configuration  (Figure 25) or SPLIT (piano/organ keyboard) (Figure 26). &amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:Fig31.jpg |560px | center]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Keyboard Mode&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Split&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates the note where the left/right split is made. By clicking Split you may adjust the split point.&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Accordion Mode&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;The left and right hands are physically separated, so the Split indicator does not appear.&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In Organ Mode:&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; VA2 recognizes chords for accompaniment only left from the Split point! From the Split point to the right end of the keys you can play melody!&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The dashes --- after [ACCORDION] or [C3]  indicates the chords recognized and played by the arranger when it is in operation.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; is selected from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; button &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI PORTS...&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FRAME R ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Frame R shows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the first line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; selected instrument or timbre for the right hand of an accordion or the  right  side of  the  split  point  for  piano and organ  (ROCK  PIANO  in the example above).&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the  second  line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; the sound group of the RIGHT voice (PIANO in the example)&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dt&amp;gt;In the third line&amp;lt;/dt&amp;gt;&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt; the tone of the second voice (VIOLA in the example).&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PLAYER A ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this area, you can load the styles of different formats (Ketron, YAMAHA and ROLAND), MIDI Sequences (*. Mid), the KARAOKE files (*. Kar). &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Hover the cursor  on  the  name  of  the  SONG  and the parent STYLE is  displayed  in  a  yellow  name  tag, for example:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig33.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PLAYER B ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;In this area, you can load audio files (*. Mp3, *. Wav, *. Wma). &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The active player has his letter surrounded by a white rectangle.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Also be aware that the play function of Player B can only be operated from an external controller, such as your midi keyboard or Korg NanoKontrol2 or similar.&lt;br /&gt;
Controls can be &amp;lt;Start/Stop&amp;gt; &amp;lt;Crossfader&amp;gt; between Player A and Player B&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.4._OCTAVE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=726</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=726"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:03:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate - &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can be controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available on the KORG website) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3&#039;rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules. &lt;br /&gt;
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create A Chordsheet =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G.  Then close the window. Launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== CHORD RECOGNITION  VELOCITY THRESHOLD ====&lt;br /&gt;
This slider allows you to filter and NOT consider the played notes with a velocity bellow a certain threshold into the CHORD recognition engine.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists, as unwanted low volumes notes are easily sent when open strings are lightly touched.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The default value is 0 = NO FILTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you raise the threshold slider to value 64, all notes played with a velocity below 64 will not change the chord.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Try to find the maximum value when the chord is correctly changing, without having to play too hard.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====&lt;br /&gt;
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP&#039;s and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The global section (red)&#039;&#039;&#039; allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The DSP section (yellow)&#039;&#039;&#039; allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each of this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets in the list boxes. It is recommended to use this presets. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The track link section (blue)&#039;&#039;&#039;  allows  to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. You have to program each dsp one by one with the paraemters in the yellow section. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. In this case you have to programm only one DSP for both channels. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Workarround for change parameters:&#039;&#039;&#039; Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot figure of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter  on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot figure  for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows also not to save the parameters for each song.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning:&#039;&#039;&#039; The SD1000 has a polyphony of only 128. It can happen that this amount of polyphony will be reached in some songs. Unfortunatly the SD1000 has no intelligent polyphony management and will cut the last instruments. That means the instrument is suddenly disrupted. You have then to set tracks off to avoid the border of 128 polyphony.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== the vARRANGER ² icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.2._TRANSPOSE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.2._TRANSPOSE&amp;diff=725</id>
		<title>5.2. TRANSPOSE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.2._TRANSPOSE&amp;diff=725"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T11:00:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This affects all the notes coming out from the MIDIOUT except those of DRUMS and PERC (LIVE DRUMS) channel &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig27.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.3._REALTIME_DISPLAY]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=724</id>
		<title>5.1. WINDOWS PROGRAM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM&amp;diff=724"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T10:59:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== OPTIONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig2.jpg  |640px  ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window (Fig3) shows the available options for vA2. It allows the user to configure Midi Ports, Controllers, Song Chords, Master, Effects and Arabic Scale. The Effects are only available in the Yamaha mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig3.jpg  |280px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI PORTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to choose which MIDI interfaces will be active in IN and OUT from &lt;br /&gt;
those connected to the computer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be controlled by one, two or up to three MIDI inputs with the following features:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[File:Tabelle1.jpg |640px  | center]]   in case we need it again --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=wikitable style=&amp;quot;margin: auto;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! MIDI Input || &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Feature || Notes and Observations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MIDI IN 1 || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default input and is particularly suitable for everyday use from a master keyboard. It can receive:&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;LEFT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Notes to be played by the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;RIGHT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; part.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to control the arranger.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI notes to assign messages in the menu CONTROLLERS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 2  || MIDI Instrument &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input allows you to connect a second MIDI Instrument.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is checked, then the notes received here will also be played by &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*If &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Play Notes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; checked, then the notes received here can be used, for example, to adjust volume or panning, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;amp;lowast;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; MIDI IN 3  || MIDI Controller&lt;br /&gt;
| This input is reserved for the use only of a MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Optional &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; JOYSTICK || Commands&lt;br /&gt;
| This option allows &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; to receive external commands from a USB connected device&lt;br /&gt;
with a joystick-type operation, for example, analogue pedals with a USB interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lowast; Provided that the MIDI interface is equipped with several MIDI IN input ports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KEYBOARD MODE: By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; KEYBOARD MODE is configured on the MIDI CHANNEL &lt;br /&gt;
1 (Fig. 4) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig4.jpg |480px | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ACCORDION MODE: This mode is activated by selecting MIDI ACCORDION, it is then possible &lt;br /&gt;
to set the MIDI channel for the right hand (Right), the MIDI channel for the left hand (Left) and &lt;br /&gt;
the MIDI channel for Bass (Bass). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig5.jpg |480px | center]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, only the MIDI ports used are displayed. This window also enables a second and a third MIDI input (MIDI pedal for example)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI LED FEEDBACK&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
Some MIDI controllers, such as the KORG nanoKONTROL2 have buttons that can illuminate - &lt;br /&gt;
these lights can be controlled via MIDI.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIDEO:&#039;&#039;&#039;   http://youtu.be/otV1oLeaLRE&lt;br /&gt;
This option gives you a visual acknowledgement, without having to look at the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, you can assign 4 buttons to variations ABCD of the arranger. The physical buttons will illuminate when they are pressed, corresponding to the buttons on the computer screen. &lt;br /&gt;
This option is active in OPTIONS / MIDI PORTS. &lt;br /&gt;
In the figure below, the 2nd MIDI IN is selected. By checking the LED feedback &lt;br /&gt;
box of this MIDI (Fig. 6) entry, you can choose the MIDI port to accept control LED (fig. 7)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig6.jpg |480px | center ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: To accept the control of LEDs, MIDI controller may require adjustments. For example, for &lt;br /&gt;
the  KORG  nanoKONTROL2  the  KORG  Kontrol  Editor  program  (available on the KORG website) and select is used:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
- CONTROL MODE = CC &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- LED MODE = EXTERNAL &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7a.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, for each button, choose: &lt;br /&gt;
- ASSIGN TYPE = BUTTON CONTROL CHANGE BEHAVIOR = MOMENTARY-OFF VALUE = 0 - ON VALUE = 127 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig7b.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To save the settings, go to the menu Communication, Write Scene Data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution: Before version 1.17, vArranger worked in TOGGLE mode, now you will probably re-set your midi controller MOMENTARY mode. Most MIDI controllers are factory configured in this way&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For best sound results, you must choose the mode that best suits your tone generator module. &lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI OUT framework offers a choice between GM modes, GM2, GS, XG, Ketron SD2 and &lt;br /&gt;
SD4 depending on the device connected to MIDI OUT. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : The choice Ketron SD2 and SD4 leads to the appearance of the check MY SD2/SD4 &lt;br /&gt;
Freezes box in the OPTIONS window - MASTER &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The GS mode is recommended for Roland synthesizers.&lt;br /&gt;
XG mode is recommended for Yamaha synthesizers. &lt;br /&gt;
GM2  mode  is  recommended  in  all  other  cases,  such  as the  Hypersonic  2  VST  or  other  GM compatible VST.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SYNCRO OUT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The ability to synchronize vArranger with other software or MIDI synthesizers. To do this, check the box next to Send Clock MIDI output concerned.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For proper operation, it is necessary to set other software or MIDI synthesizer, so they accept to synchronize to an external MIDI clock. Refer to the manual of your 3&#039;rd party MIDI synthesizer or software synthesizer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With this option &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; can play in synchronicity with another arranger, arpeggiator, sequencer or drum machine, etc.. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not use this function, it is advisable to leave this box unchecked, because it sends continuous MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to use up to three sound modules simultaneously with &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting the midi ports in MIDI and MIDI OUT 2 OUT 3. &lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you for example to double the polyphony of Ketron sound modules, by adding additional modules. &lt;br /&gt;
Press the START button to confirm the settings during initial installation, or after changes made afterwards.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CONTROLLERS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to manage the behavior of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; against external controls, they are: &lt;br /&gt;
an external MIDI controller (MIDI CONTROLLED BY INPUT) (Master keyboard or MIDI Foot ...) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig8.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
the keyboard of the computer (PC CONTROLLED BY KEYBOARD)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig9.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
an external device connected via USB (CONTROLLED BYJOYSTICK) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig10.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To  assign  a  function  to  an  external  controller,  we  choose  first  the  desired  among  those presented in the table (see Fig. 9) by clicking on the corresponding line function then press the MIDI controller or the key on the PC keyboard key or joystick of the desired use. All settings are done, you can close the window with the OK button.  All these settings are saved and reloaded automatically at each session. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig11.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039; Here, various functions &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; controlled by a pedal Ketron ® type FS13.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: If a key on the PC keyboard, a MIDI button, etc ... is already assigned to a function of &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; It is no longer possible to assign a different function. A message will be displayed. Here, for example, it is reported that the key on the PC  keyboard (code 157) is already assigned to the CHANGE DOWN function. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig12.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At  the  bottom  of  the  window  CONTROLLERS  (OPTIONS  /, scroll  MIDI  events  entering &lt;br /&gt;
vArranger  (outside  of  active  sensing  messages  and  midi  clock).  This  can  be  useful  to  know  what instruments and MIDI controllers send.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig13.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SONG CHORDS ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig14.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== SONG CHORDS is a 2 in 1 function that allows you to: ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create A Chordsheet =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly create accompanying music from A to Z. To do this, select a style, and click OPTIONS, &lt;br /&gt;
SONG CHORDS. &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; then opens the chord grid of the song on the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* By clicking on a measure, we enter the chord for the selected beat. &lt;br /&gt;
* By  clicking  on  the  upper  part  of  the  measure,  one  can  select  a  variation  from  those  of  the current  style  (A, B, C, D, Main,  Fill,  Intro,  Ending.). For  each  style and for  each  of  its  sections are show its  style name, and in brackets, its duration in  measures. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig15.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  you  click  on  measure,  the data my be set  the  mouse,  or  by playing a MIDI instrument, or by typing the letters on the ASCII keyboard provided they are not already assigned in the &#039;&#039;&#039;MENU CONTROLLERS&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chords in the grid, you can listen the full accompaniment by using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY SONG&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also transpose the SONG CHORDS by semitone, without re-entering data, simply by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE + or -&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
With the CLEAR ALL button, it erases everything. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A right-click in a measure opens the following pop-up window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig16.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From this window you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;INSERT&#039;&#039;&#039; one or more measures (four measures in the example above).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT FROM -&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; this measure  to another measure &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;-TO SELECT&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;SELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DESELECT ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; measures in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;COPY&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection from the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PASTE &#039;?&#039; TIMES&#039;&#039;&#039; your selection several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig17.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DELETE&#039;&#039;&#039;  the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;CLEAR&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE -&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;TRANSPOSE +&#039;&#039;&#039; the selection or measure.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;PLAY FROM HERE&#039;&#039;&#039; plays the accompaniment from this measure&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :Double click an extent plays SONG CHORDS for this measure, each beat during play is highlighted in a salmon pink colour as below in an example in 3/4 time: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig18.jpg |360px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some actions require a confirmation like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig19.jpg | 240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The insertion of 24 measures will extends the window by those 24 measures.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save your song by using the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE SONG&#039;&#039; button, setting appropriate song name an location. The &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; option is already checked, so press the &#039;&#039;&#039;SAVE&#039;&#039;&#039;  button to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly and easily create MIDI accompaniment files for sharing, by clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;EXPORT TO MIDIFILE&#039;&#039;&#039;. The file should open in any professional MIDI sequencer.&lt;br /&gt;
From this base, to simplify work, add VST audio tracks of your choice ... and burn your CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Set Up the vRIFF Function: =====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORDS&#039;&#039;&#039; can be used in another manner.  Enter some chords into the &#039;&#039;&#039;SONG CHORD&#039;&#039;&#039; window, for example: C Am F  G.  Then close the window. Launch &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;  (START) and play some chords. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Above the four variations of the style (Main A, B,C, D)  there is a button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it changes its colour what you hear is now controlled by the series of chords previously returned accompaniment.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The table below summarizes the different configurations vRIFF button: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tabelle2.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Right click on the button shows the vRIFF SONG CHORDS editing window. &lt;br /&gt;
Pianists now have both hands free to play other things, and the left hand does not control agreements. It is also possible to assign two different sounds Right and Left at the same time as the &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF cheek&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can  regain  control  of  the  fix  to  ANY  TIME  by  clicking  on  the  button  &#039;&#039;&#039;vRIFF, or until the agreement is terminated sequence itself (vRIFF then resumes its gray).&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is even possible to apply a fill, a INTRO, ENDING during an execution of a SONG CHORD. It should be noted that the instructions SONG CHORD have priority in case of simultaneous orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
You can assign the knob vRIFF CONTROLLERS menu. &lt;br /&gt;
Do not forget to SAVE / SONG and SONG CHORDS box toremember your power vRIFF the next time you play that style. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Features&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that SAVE / SONG stores the state of vRIFF button. It is possible to play the chord grid directly loading the style, enabling thevRIFF button and saving the SONG. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once  the  chord  grid  entry,  you  can  try  other  styles on  the  same  grid  by  pressing  the  button vRIFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MIDI EVENTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all the events contained in the MIDIFILE or STYLE YAMAHA year.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig20.jpg |640px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== MASTER ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following master window is used to set some parameters of the ketron SD2 soundmodule: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;BASS  BOOST : &#039;&#039;&#039; Adjusts  the equalizer  by  selecting  the  correct frequency  and  gain.  Asterisks &lt;br /&gt;
indicate default values. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI INPUT GAIN: &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI MIDI IN1 and IN2 potentiometers are used to adjust the overall level of &lt;br /&gt;
MIDI inputs 1 and 2 respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If when you play the melody notes, the sound of your MIDI instrument is too low, or you need to &lt;br /&gt;
play hard to reach high velocities, you can add a bit of gain with these controls. It is advisable to &lt;br /&gt;
leave these two knobs to 0, and adjust the velocitycurve in the options of your MIDI instrument, &lt;br /&gt;
if the permits. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig21.jpg |480px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MY SD2/SD4 Freezes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
The old Ketron SD2 have a bug and sometimes crash. This option, MY SD2/SD4 freezes, once &lt;br /&gt;
selected, prevents the SD2 plant, filtering some MIDI messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Note&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : This option is checked by default, appears if a  SD2 and SD4 is a selected MIDI OUT &lt;br /&gt;
(OPTION, MIDI PORTS). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If  your  SD2  does  not  crash  when  reading  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;midi  test-it &amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;  is  better  to  shoot  and  all  the  midi messages are sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Midi test: http://www.varranger.fr/vforum/index.php/topic, 112.msg2123.html&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== CHORD RECOGNITION  VELOCITY THRESHOLD ====&lt;br /&gt;
This slider allows you to filter and NOT consider the played notes with a velocity bellow a certain threshold into the CHORD recognition engine.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is especially useful for MIDI guitarists, as unwanted low volumes notes are easily sent when open strings are lightly touched.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The default value is 0 = NO FILTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you raise the threshold slider to value 64, all notes played with a velocity below 64 will not change the chord.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Try to find the maximum value when the chord is correctly changing, without having to play too hard.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EFFECTS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig22.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This window allows you to set the CHORUS DELAY DISTORTION effects. Of which device?&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ketron SD1000 Effects ====&lt;br /&gt;
If in the Midi ports menu the SD1000 option is selected, in the option/effect menu will be shown the SD1000 EFFECTS window, where the parameters of the ketron SD1000 soundmodule can be set.The SD1000 owns two DSP&#039;s and allows to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. But the SD1000 allows also to set global reverb-, chorus-parameters and has a global parameterizable equalizer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2SD1000 DSP.jpg |560px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The SD1000 EFFECTS window has different sections with parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The global section (red)&#039;&#039;&#039; allows to set the Master levels for reverb and chorus and set the type and parameters for the two effects. It allows the parametrization of a two band equalizer with the GAIN and FREQ parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The DSP section (yellow)&#039;&#039;&#039; allows to set different effects like compressor, filter, distortion etc.... For each of this effects can be selected the built in SD1000 presets in the list boxes. It is recommended to use this presets. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The track link section (blue)&#039;&#039;&#039;  allows  to send two different effects to each of the sixteen tracks of the vA2. You have to program each dsp one by one with the paraemters in the yellow section. As a special options one effect can be sent as stereo output. In this case you have to programm only one DSP for both channels. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SD1000 Effects.jpeg |760px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Workarround for change parameters:&#039;&#039;&#039; Due to technical issues into the SD1000 it is not possible to read back the parameters of the SD1000 and allows therfore not to show the parameters that are actually set into the SD1000 EFFECTS window. For changes and documentation one should make a snapshot figure of the SD1000 EFFECTS window with the defined parameters. For changing a parameter  on should reconstruct the parameters with the snapshot figure and then make the change(s) and make a new snapshot figure  for further changes. This mentioned issue obove allows also not to save the parameters for each song.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning:&#039;&#039;&#039; The SD1000 has a polyphony of only 128. It can happen that this amount of polyphony will be reached in some songs. Unfortunatly the SD1000 has no intelligent polyphony management and will cut the last instruments. That means the instrument is suddenly disrupted. You have then to set tracks off to avoid the border of 128 polyphony.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARABIC SCALE ===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to create valid ranges in countries that use the Arabic scales. Selected notes (in red) are lowered by a quarter tone, the OFF button restores each note their original &lt;br /&gt;
intonation. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig23.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;:  To delete this window it is necessary to return to OPTIONS then ARABIC SCALE &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  MIDI ACTIVITY ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the top bar of the main window, there are four icons, each representing one of the four MIDI inputs and showing its MIDI activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== the vARRANGER ² icon ==&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on this title, an information window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig24.jpg |240px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PANIC ==&lt;br /&gt;
With low quality MIDI interface, some MIDI messages can be lost, and this result in some never ending notes, or wrong chord recognition.&lt;br /&gt;
This red button sends the command  &amp;quot;ALL NOTES OFF&amp;quot; on all MIDI channels, with the intention to stop all sound, and tries to reset most of the actual settings of vArranger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if the problem involves, for example, a disconnected MIDI cable, then the message can&#039;t arrive and any previously played notes will remain audible.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig25.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== TIME ==&lt;br /&gt;
Displays the current time. By clicking on the display, a display is tilted 12 to 24h &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig26.jpg |120px | center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== MINIMIZE AND CLOSE ICONS ==&lt;br /&gt;
These are located at the right-hand end of the top-bar and work like the usual Windows minimize and close icons. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A click on the minimize button of the window also momentarily frees keys assigned to PC keyboard for &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in CONTROLLERS, you can assign the &amp;quot;MINIMIZE / RESTORE APP&amp;quot; function to the PC Escape (Esc) key.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, a first press of the &amp;quot;Esc&amp;quot; key will minimize the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window, the second press restores the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window to the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking somewhere in the black background will brings the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; window from normal to full screen and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When in the normal mode, you can also move and resize the window in the usual way.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.2._TRANSPOSE]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5._FUNCTIONS_vA2&amp;diff=723</id>
		<title>5. FUNCTIONS vA2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=5._FUNCTIONS_vA2&amp;diff=723"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T10:57:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;By default &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; starts in full screen mode.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;If you wish a different window size or arrangement, double-click on the background of the main window to resize it.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Right click opens a pop-up window for [[File: save as.jpg |200px]] saving the &amp;quot;User&amp;quot; startup size of the main window.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig1Interfaceva.jpg |700x500px ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:[[5.1._WINDOWS_PROGRAM | 5.1. THE MAIN SCREEN]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=4._INSTALLATION&amp;diff=722</id>
		<title>4. INSTALLATION</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=4._INSTALLATION&amp;diff=722"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T10:57:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /*  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
==  == &lt;br /&gt;
After ordering on the Website at: https://www.varranger.com&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or directly through PayPal at:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:va2paypallogo_150px.jpg|150x150px|link=https://www.paypal.com/webapps/hermes?token=43C84034J1051454E&amp;amp;useraction=commit&amp;amp;mfid=1562138739635_453985dd3da9f#/checkout/guest]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will receive (within 24 hours) the installation instructions and the vArranger2 software download via email.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose between two modes of installation: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) - Installation on your computer (requires no USB, but only works on a single computer). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2) - Installation on your USB Flash Drive (brand Kingston, Sandisk, etc.), so you can use the software on any &lt;br /&gt;
computer by plugging in the USB Flash Drive with Activation Key (Dongle) before launching vArranger. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This choice is final.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[5._FUNCTIONS_vA2]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=2._PRINCIPLE_OF_OPERATION&amp;diff=721</id>
		<title>2. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.varranger.com/wiki/index.php?title=2._PRINCIPLE_OF_OPERATION&amp;diff=721"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T10:56:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Pwevarranger2: /*  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Connect your computer to the favorite MIDI instrument (usually a keyboard with a MIDI or &lt;br /&gt;
USB output, but also guitar MIDI, MIDI accordion ...). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect the computer to a MIDI synthesizer (sound generator).  &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; recognizes played chords in &amp;quot;real time&amp;quot; and generates a complete &lt;br /&gt;
orchestration  in  the  chosen  style,  while  allowing  you  full  control  over  all  aspects  of  your &lt;br /&gt;
instrumental performance.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Rather than  developing  software  with  thousands  of  parameters  to  enter  into  menus  and sub-menus, we opted for a more integrated approach.  We decided to offer a ready-to-use solution for  the musician, from beginning to end, for the chain of sound production. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Of course, the software is inherently scalable and we are in constant technological monitoring to &lt;br /&gt;
integrate progressively solutions that really seem workable for the musician. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Our first choice turned to integration of the Ketron SD2 sound module.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Here is one of the possible configurations  for the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;vA2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fig78.jpg |360px] | center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NEXT&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[3._FEATURES]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Pwevarranger2</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>